The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Plastic Age, by Percy Marks

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net


Title: The Plastic Age

Author: Percy Marks

Release Date: August 15, 2005 [EBook #16532]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ASCII

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PLASTIC AGE ***




Produced by Scott G. Sims and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net






THE PLASTIC AGE

BY

PERCY MARKS

ILLUSTRATED WITH SCENES
FROM THE PHOTOPLAY
A PREFERRED PICTURE


GROSSET & DUNLAP
PUBLISHERS NEW YORK

[Illustration: "SHE'S _MY_ GIRL! HANDS OFF!"]

Made in the United States of America

1924
THE CENTURY Co.
PRINTED IN U. S. A.


To
MY MOTHER




LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

  "SHE'S _MY_ GIRL! HANDS OFF!"
  "LOOK! FLANNELS FOR MAMMA'S BOY!"
  "COME ON--I KNOW WHERE THERE'S LIQUID REFRESHMENT!"
  "THAT'S CYNTHIA DAY--A REAL HOTSY-TOTSY!"
  "DANCE, SALOME!"
  HUGH'S POPULARITY IS ESTABLISHED AFTER THE FIRST ATHLETIC TRY-OUTS.
  "ONE TURN, HUGH, AND WE'LL QUIT THESE JOINTS FOR GOOD!"
  CARL FORGETS HIS ANIMOSITY IN HONEST ADMIRATION FOR HUGH.




THE PLASTIC AGE




CHAPTER I


When an American sets out to found a college, he hunts first for a hill.
John Harvard was an Englishman and indifferent to high places. The
result is that Harvard has become a university of vast proportions and
no color. Yale flounders about among the New Haven shops, trying to rise
above them. The Harkness Memorial tower is successful; otherwise the
university smells of trade. If Yale had been built on a hill, it would
probably be far less important and much more interesting.

Hezekiah Sanford was wise; he found first his hill and then founded his
college, believing probably that any one ambitious enough to climb the
hill was a man fit to wrestle with learning and, if need be, with Satan
himself. Satan was ever before Hezekiah, and he fought him valiantly,
exorcising him every morning in chapel and every evening at prayers. The
first students of Sanford College learned Latin and Greek and to fear
the devil. There are some who declare that their successors learn less.

Hezekiah built Sanford Hall, a fine Georgian building, performed the
duties of trustees, president, dean, and faculty for thirty years, and
then passed to his reward, leaving three thousand acres, his library of
five hundred books, mostly sermons, Sanford Hall, and a charter that
opened the gates of Sanford to all men so that they might "find the true
light of God and the glory of Jesus in the halls of this most liberal
college."

More than a century had passed since Hezekiah was laid to rest in
Haydensville's cemetery. The college had grown miraculously and changed
even more miraculously. Only the hill and its beautiful surroundings
remained the same. Indian Lake, on the south of the campus, still
sparkled in the sunlight; on the east the woods were as virgin as they
had been a hundred and fifty years before. Haydensville, still only a
village, surrounded the college on the west and north.

Hezekiah's successors had done strange things to his campus. There were
dozens of buildings now surrounding Sanford Hall, and they revealed all
the types of architecture popular since Hezekiah had thundered his last
defiance at Satan. There were fine old colonial buildings, their windows
outlined by English ivy; ponderous Romanesque buildings made of stone,
grotesque and hideous; a pseudo-Gothic chapel with a tower of
surpassing loveliness; and four laboratories of the purest factory
design. But despite the conglomerate and sometimes absurd
architecture--a Doric temple neighbored a Byzantine mosque--the campus
was beautiful. Lawns, often terraced, stretched everywhere, and the
great elms lent a dignity to Sanford College that no architect, however
stupid, could quite efface.

This first day of the new college year was glorious in the golden haze
of Indian summer. The lake was silver blue, the long reflections of the
trees twisting and bending as a soft breeze ruffled the surface into
tiny waves. The hills already brilliant with color--scarlet, burnt
orange, mauve, and purple--flamed up to meet the clear blue sky; the
elms softly rustled their drying leaves; the white houses of the village
retreated coyly behind maples and firs and elms: everywhere there was
peace, the peace that comes with strength that has been stronger than
time.

As Hugh Carver hastened up the hill from the station, his two suit-cases
banged his legs and tripped him. He could hardly wait to reach the
campus. The journey had been intolerably long--Haydensville was more
than three hundred miles from Merrytown, his home--and he was wild to
find his room in Surrey Hall. He wondered how he would like his
room-mate, Peters.... What's his name? Oh, yes, Carl.... The registrar
had written that Peters had gone to Kane School.... Must be pretty fine.
Ought to be first-class to room with.... Hugh hoped that Peters wouldn't
think that he was too country....

Hugh was a slender lad who looked considerably less than his eighteen
years. A gray cap concealed his sandy brown hair, which he parted on the
side and which curled despite all his brushing. His crystalline blue
eyes, his small, neatly carved nose, his sensitive mouth that hid a shy
and appealing smile, were all very boyish. He seemed young, almost
pathetically young.

People invariably called him a nice boy, and he didn't like it; in fact,
he wanted to know how they got that way. They gave him the pip, that's
what they did. He guessed that a fellow who could run the hundred in 10:
2 and out-box anybody in high school wasn't such a baby. Why, he had
overheard one of the old maid teachers call him sweet. Sweet! Cripes,
that old hen made him sick. She was always pawing him and sticking her
skinny hands in his hair. He was darn glad to get to college where there
were only men teachers.

Women always wanted to get their hands into his hair, and boys liked him
on sight. Many of those who were streaming up the hill before and behind
him, who passed him or whom he passed, glanced at his eager face and
thought that there was a guy they'd like to know.

An experienced observer would have divided those boys into three groups:
preparatory school boys, carelessly at ease, well dressed, or, as the
college argot has it, "smooth"; boys from city schools, not so well
dressed perhaps, certainly not so sure of themselves; and country boys,
many of them miserably confused and some of them clad in Kollege Kut
Klothes that they would shamefacedly discard within a week.

Hugh finally reached the top of the hill, and the campus was before him.
He had visited the college once with his father and knew his way about.
Eager as he was to reach Surrey Hall, he paused to admire the
pseudo-Gothic chapel. He felt a little thrill of pride as he stared in
awe at the magnificent building. It had been willed to the college by an
alumnus who had made millions selling rotten pork.

Hugh skirted two of the factory laboratories, hurried between the Doric
temple and Byzantine mosque, paused five times to direct confused
classmates, passed a dull red colonial building, and finally stood
before Surrey Hall, a large brick dormitory half covered by ivy.

He hurried up-stairs and down a corridor until he found a door with 19
on it. He knocked.

"What th' hell! Come in." The voice was impatiently cheerful.

Hugh pushed open the door and entered the room to meet wild
confusion--and his room-mate. The room was a clutter of suit-cases,
trunks, clothes, banners, unpacked furniture, pillows, pictures,
golf-sticks, tennis-rackets, and photographs--dozens of photographs, all
of them of girls apparently. In the middle of the room a boy was on his
knees before an open trunk. He had sleek black hair, parted meticulously
in the center, a slender face with rather sharp features and large black
eyes that almost glittered. His lips were full and very red, almost too
red, and his cheeks seemed to be colored with a hard blush.

"Hullo," he said in a clear voice as Hugh came in. "Who are you?"

Hugh flushed slightly. "I'm Carver," he answered, "Hugh Carver."

The other lad jumped to his feet, revealing, to Hugh's surprise, golf
knickers. He was tall, slender, and very neatly built.

"Hell!" he exclaimed. "I ought to have guessed that." He held out his
hand. "I'm Carl Peters, the guy you've got to room with--and God help
you."

Hugh dropped his suit-cases and shook hands. "Guess I can stand it," he
said with a quick laugh to hide his embarrassment. "Maybe you'll need a
little of God's help yourself." Diffident and unsure, he smiled--and
Peters liked him on the spot.

"Chase yourself," Peters said easily. "I know a good guy when I see one.
Sit down somewhere--er, here." He brushed a pile of clothes off a trunk
to the floor with one sweep of his arm. "Rest yourself after climbing
that goddamn hill. Christ! It's a bastard, that hill is. Say, your
trunk's down-stairs. I saw it. I'll help you bring it up soon's you've
got your wind."

Hugh was rather dazzled by the rapid, staccato talk, and, to tell the
truth, he was a little shocked by the profanity. Not that he wasn't used
to profanity; he had heard plenty of that in Merrytown, but he didn't
expect somehow that a college man--that is, a prep-school man--would use
it. He felt that he ought to make some reply to Peters's talk, but he
didn't know just what would do. Peters saved him the trouble.

"I'll tell you, Carver--oh, hell, I'm going to call you Hugh--we're
going to have a swell joint here. Quite the darb. Three rooms, you know;
a bedroom for each of us and this big study. I've brought most of the
junk that I had at Kane, and I s'pose you've got some of your own."

"Not much," Hugh replied, rather ashamed of what he thought might be
considered stinginess. He hastened to explain that he didn't know what
Carl would have; so he thought that he had better wait and get his stuff
at college.

"That's the bean," exclaimed Carl, He had perched himself on the
window-seat. He threw one well shaped leg over the other and gazed at
Hugh admiringly. "You certainly used the old bean. Say, I've got a hell
of a lot of truck here, and if you'd a brought much, we'd a been
swamped.... Say, I'll tell you how we fix this dump." He jumped up, led
Hugh on a tour of the rooms, discussed the disposal of the various
pieces of furniture with enormous gusto, and finally pointed to the
photographs.

"Hope you don't mind my harem," he said, making a poor attempt to hide
his pride.

"It's some harem," replied Hugh in honest awe.

Again he felt ashamed. He had pictures of his father and mother, and
that was all. He'd write to Helen for one right away. "Where'd you get
all of 'em? You've certainly got a collection."

"Sure have. The album of hearts I've broken. When I've kissed a girl
twice I make her give me her picture. I've forgotten the names of some
of these janes. I collected ten at Bar Harbor this summer and three at
Christmas Cove. Say, this kid--" he fished through a pile of
pictures--"was the hottest little devil I ever met." He passed to Hugh a
cabinet photograph of a standard flapper. "Pet? My God!" He cast his
eyes ceilingward ecstatically.

Hugh's mind was a battle-field of disapproval and envy. Carl dazzled and
confused him. He had often listened to the recitals of their exploits by
the Merrytown Don Juans, but this good-looking, sophisticated lad
evidently had a technique and breadth of experience quite unknown to
Merrytown. He wanted badly to hear more, but time was flying and he
hadn't even begun to unpack.

"Will you help me bring up my trunk?" he asked half shyly.

"Oh, hell, yes. I'd forgotten all about that. Come on."

They spent the rest of the afternoon unpacking, arranging and
rearranging the furniture and pictures. They found a restaurant and had
dinner. Then they returned to 19 Surrey and rearranged the furniture
once more, pausing occasionally to chat while Carl smoked. He offered
Hugh a cigarette. Hugh explained that he did not smoke, that he was a
sprinter and that the coaches said that cigarettes were bad for a
runner.

"Right-o," said Carl, respecting the reason thoroughly. "I can't run
worth a damn myself, but I'm not bad at tennis--not very good, either.
Say, if you're a runner you ought to make a fraternity easy. Got your
eye on one?"

"Well," said Hugh, "my father's a Nu Delt."

"The Nu Delts. Phew! High-hat as hell." He looked at Hugh enviously.
"Say, you certainly are set. Well, my old man never went to college, but
I want to tell you that he left us a whale of a lot of jack when he
passed out a couple of years ago."

"What!" Hugh exclaimed, staring at him in blank astonishment.

In an instant Carl was on his feet, his flashing eyes dimmed by tears.
"My old man was the best scout that ever lived--the best damned old
scout that ever lived." His sophistication was all gone; he was just a
small boy, heartily ashamed of himself and ready to cry. "I want you to
know that," he ended defiantly.

At once Hugh was all sympathy. "Sure, I know," he said softly. Then he
smiled and added, "So's mine."

Carl's face lost its lugubriousness in a broad grin. "I'm a fish," he
announced. "Let's hit the hay."

"You said it!"




CHAPTER II


Hugh wrote two letters before he went to bed, one to his mother and
father and the other to Helen Simpson. His letter to Helen was very
brief, merely a request for her photograph.

Then, his mind in a whirl of excitement, he went to bed and lay awake
dreaming, thinking of Carl, the college, and, most of all, of Helen and
his walk with her the day before.

He had called on her to say good-by. They had been "going together" for
a year, and she was generally considered his girl. She was a pretty
child with really beautiful brown hair, which she had foolishly bobbed,
lively blue eyes, and an absurdly tiny snub nose. She was little, with
quick, eager hands--a shallow creature who was proud to be seen with
Hugh because he had been captain of the high-school track team. But she
did wish that he wasn't so slow. Why, he had kissed her only once, and
that had been a silly peck on the cheek. Perhaps he was just shy, but
sometimes she was almost sure that he was "plain dumb."

They had walked silently along the country road to the woods that
skirted the town. An early frost had already touched the foliage with
scarlet and orange. They sat down on a fallen log, and Hugh gazed at a
radiant maple-tree.

Helen let her hand drop lightly on his. "Thinking of me?" she asked
softly.

Hugh squeezed her hand. "Yes," he whispered, and looked at the ground
while he scuffed some fallen leaves with the toe of his shoe.

"I am going to miss you, Hughie--oh, awfully. Are you going to miss me?"

He held her hand tightly and said nothing. He was aware only of her
hand. His throat seemed to be stopped, choked with something.

A bird that should have been on its way south chirped from a tree near
by. The sound made Hugh look up. He noticed that the shadows were
lengthening. He and Helen would have to start back pretty soon or he
would be late for dinner. There was still packing to do; his mother had
said that his father wanted to have a talk with him--and through all his
thoughts there ran like a fiery red line the desire to kiss the girl
whose hand was clasped in his.

He turned slightly toward her. "Hughie," she whispered and moved close
to him. His heart stopped as he loosened her hand from his and put his
arm around her. With a contented sigh she rested her head on one
shoulder and her hand on the other. "Hughie dear," she breathed softly.

He hesitated no longer. His heart was beating so that he could not
speak, but he bent and kissed her. And there they sat for half an hour
more, close in each other's embrace, speaking no words, but losing
themselves in kisses that seemed to have no end.

Finally Hugh realized that darkness had fallen. He drew the yielding
girl to her feet and started home, his arm around her. When they reached
her gate, he embraced her once more and kissed her as if he could never
let her go. A light flashed in a window. Frightened, he tried to leave,
but she clung to him.

"I must go," he whispered desperately.

"I'm going to miss you awfully." He thought that she was weeping--and
kissed her again. Then as another window shot light into the yard, he
forced her arms from around his neck.

"Good-by, Helen. Write to me." His voice was rough and husky.

"Oh, I will. Good-by--darling."

He walked home tingling with emotion. He wanted to shout; he felt
suddenly grown up. Golly, but Helen was a little peach. He felt her arms
around his neck again, her lips pressed maddeningly to his. For an
instant he was dizzy....

       *       *       *       *       *

As he lay in bed in 19 Surrey thinking of Helen, he tried to summon that
glorious intoxication again. But he failed. Carl, the college,
registration--a thousand thoughts intruded themselves. Already Helen
seemed far away, a little nebulous. He wondered why....




CHAPTER III


For the next few days Carl and Hugh did little but wait in line. They
lined up to register; they lined up to pay tuition; they lined up to
shake hands with President Culver; they lined up to talk for two quite
useless minutes with the freshman dean; they lined up to be assigned
seats in the commons. Carl suggested that he and Hugh line up in the
study before going to bed so that they would keep in practice. Then they
had to attend lectures given by various members of the faculty about
college customs, college manners, college honor, college everything.
After the sixth of them, Hugh, thoroughly weary and utterly confused,
asked Carl if he now had any idea of what college was.

"Yes," replied Carl; "it's a young ladies' school for very nice boys."

"Well," Hugh said desperately, "if I have to listen to about two more
awfully noble lectures, I'm going to get drunk. I have a hunch that
college isn't anything like what these old birds say it is. I hope not,
anyway."

"Course it isn't. Say, why wait for two more of the damn things to kill
you off?" He pulled a flask out of his desk drawer and held it out
invitingly.

Hugh laughed. "You told me yourself that that stuff was catgut and that
you wouldn't drink it on a bet. Besides, you know that I don't drink. If
I'm going to make my letter, I've got to keep in trim."

"Right you are. Wish I knew what to do with this poison. If I leave it
around here, the biddy'll get hold of it, and then God help us. I'll
tell you what: after it gets dark to-night we'll take it down and poison
the waters of dear old Indian Lake."

"All right. Say, I've got to pike along; I've got a date with my faculty
adviser. Hope I don't have to stand in line."

He didn't have to stand in line--he was permitted to sit--but he did
have to wait an hour and a half. Finally a student came out of the inner
office, and a gruff voice from within called, "Next!"

"Just like a barber shop," flashed across Hugh's mind as he entered the
tiny office.

An old-young man was sitting behind a desk shuffling papers. He glanced
up as Hugh came in and motioned him to a chair beside him. Hugh sat down
and stared at his feet.

"Um, let's see. Your name's--what?"

"Carver, sir. Hugh Carver."

The adviser, Professor Kane, glanced at some notes. "Oh, yes, from
Merrytown High School, fully accredited. Are you taking an A.B. or a
B.S.?"

"I--I don't know."

"You have to have one year of college Latin for a B.S. and at least two
years of Greek besides for an A.B."

"Oh!" Hugh was frightened and confused. He knew that his father was an
A.B., but he had heard the high-school principal say that Greek was
useless nowadays. Suddenly he remembered: the principal had advised him
to take a B.S.; he had said that it was more practical.

"I guess I'd better take a B.S.," he said softly. "Very well." Professor
Kane, who hadn't yet looked at Hugh, picked up a schedule card. "Any
middle name?" he asked abruptly.

"Yes, sir--Meredith."

Kane scribbled H.M. Carver at the top of the card and then proceeded to
fill it in rapidly. He hastily explained the symbols that he was using,
but he did not say anything about the courses. When he had completed the
schedule, he copied it on another card, handed one to Hugh, and stuck
the other into a filing-box.

"Anything else?" he asked, turning his blond, blank face toward Hugh for
the first time.

Hugh stood up. There were a dozen questions that he wanted to ask. "No,
sir," he replied. "Very well, then. I am your regular adviser. You will
come to me when you need assistance. Good day."

"Good day, sir," and as Hugh passed out of the door, the gruff voice
bawled, "Next!" The boy nearest the door rose and entered the sanctum.

Hugh sought the open air and gazed at the hieroglyphics on the card.
"Guess they mean something," he mused, "but how am I going to find out?"
A sudden fear made him blanch. "I bet I get into the wrong places. Oh,
golly!"

       *       *       *       *       *

Then came the upper-classmen, nearly seven hundred of them. The quiet
campus became a bedlam of excitement and greetings. "Hi, Jack. Didya
have a good summer?"... "Well, Tom, ol' kid, I sure am glad to see you
back."... "Put her there, ol' scout; it's sure good to see you."
Everywhere the same greetings: "Didya have a good summer? Glad to see
you back." Every one called every one else by his first name; every one
shook hands with astonishing vigor, usually clutching the other fellow
by the forearm at the same time. How cockily these lads went around the
campus! No confusion or fear for them; they knew what to do.

For the first time Hugh felt a pang of homesickness; for the first time
he realized that he wasn't yet part of the college. He clung close to
Carl and one or two other lads in Surrey with whom he picked up an
acquaintance, and Carl clung close to Hugh, careful to hide the fact
that he felt very small and meek. For the first time _he_ realized that
he was just a freshman--and he didn't like it.

Then suddenly the tension, which had been gathering for a day or so,
broke. Orders went out from the upper-classmen that all freshmen put on
their baby bonnets, silly little blue caps with a bright orange button.
From that moment every freshman was doomed. Work was their lot, and
plenty of it. "Hi, freshman, carry up my trunk. Yeah, you, freshman--you
with the skinny legs. You and your fat friend carry my trunk up to the
fourth floor--and if you drop it, I'll break your fool necks."...
"Freshman! go down to the station and get my suit-cases. Here are the
checks. Hurry back if you know what's good for you."... "Freshman! go
up to Hill Twenty-eight and put the beds together."... "Freshman! come
up to my room. I want you to hang pictures."

Fortunately the labor did not last long, but while it lasted Hugh was
hustled around as he never had been before. And he loved it. He loved
his blue cap and its orange button; he loved the upper-classmen who
called him freshman and ordered him around; he loved the very trunks
that he lugged so painfully up-stairs. He was being recognized, merely
as a janitor, it is true, but recognized; at last he was a part of
Sanford College. Further, one of the men who had ordered him around the
most fiercely wore a Nu Delta pin, the emblem of his father's
fraternity. He ran that man's errands with such speed and willingness
that the hero decided that the freshman was "very, very dumb."

That night Hugh and Carl sat in 19 Surrey and rested their aching bones,
one on a couch, the other in a leather Morris chair.

"Hot stuff, wasn't it?" said Hugh, stretching out comfortably.

"Hot stuff, hell! How do they get that way?"

"Never mind; we'll do the ordering next year."

"Right you are," said Carl decisively, lighting a cigarette, "and won't
I make the little frosh walk." He gazed around the room, his face
beaming with satisfaction. "Say, we're pretty snappy here, aren't we?"

Hugh, too, looked around admiringly. The walls were almost hidden by
banners, a huge Sanford blanket--Hugh's greatest contribution--Carl's
Kane blanket, the photographs of the "harem," posters of college
athletes and movie bathing-girls, pipe-racks, and three Maxfield Parrish
prints.

"It certainly is fine," said Hugh proudly. "All we need is a barber pole
and a street sign."

"We'll have 'em before the week is out." This with great decision.




CHAPTER IV


Carl's adviser had been less efficient than Hugh's; therefore he knew
what his courses were, where the classes met and the hours, the names of
his instructors, and the requirements other than Latin for a B.S.
degree. Carl said that he was taking a B.S. because he had had a year of
Greek at Kane and was therefore perfectly competent to make full use of
the language; he could read the letters on the front doors of the
fraternity houses.

The boys found that their courses were the same but that they were in
different sections. Hugh was in a dilemma; he could make nothing out of
his card.

"Here," said Carl, "give the thing to me. My adviser was a good scout
and wised me up. This P.C. isn't paper cutting as you might suppose;
it's gym. You'll get out of that by signing up for track. P.C. means
physical culture. Think of that! You can sign up for track any time
to-morrow down at the gym. And E I, 7 means that you're in English I,
Section 7; and M is math. You re in Section 3. Lat means Latin, of
course--Section 6. My adviser--he tried pretty hard to be funny--said
that G.S. wasn't glorious salvation but general science. That meets in
the big lecture hall in Cranston. We all go to that. And H I, 4 means
that you are in Section 4 of History I. See? That's all there is to it.
Now this thing"--he held up a printed schedule--"tells you where the
classes meet."

With a great deal of labor, discussion, and profanity they finally got a
schedule made out that meant something to Hugh. He heaved a
Brobdingnagian sigh of relief when they finished.

"Well," he exclaimed, "that's that! At last I know where I'm going. You
certainly saved my life. I know where all the buildings are; so it ought
to be easy."

"Sure," said Carl encouragingly; "it's easy. Now there's nothing to do
till to-morrow until eight forty-five when we attend chapel to the glory
of the Lord. I think I'll pray to-morrow; I may need it. Christ! I hate
to study."

"Me, too," Hugh lied. He really loved books, but somehow he couldn't
admit the fact, which had suddenly become shameful, to Carl. "Let's go
to the movies," he suggested, changing the subject for safety.

"Right-o!" Carl put on his freshman cap and flung Hugh's to him. "Gloria
Nielsen is there, and she's a pash baby. Ought to be a good fillum."

The Blue and Orange--it was the only movie theater in town--was almost
full when the boys arrived. Only a few seats near the front were still
vacant. A freshman started down the aisle, his "baby bonnet" stuck
jauntily on the back of his head.

"Freshman!"... "Kill him!"... "Murder the frosh!" Shouts came from all
parts of the house, and an instant later hundreds of peanuts shot
swiftly at the startled freshman. "Cap! Cap! Cap off!" There was a panic
of excitement. Upper-classmen were standing on their chairs to get free
throwing room. The freshman snatched off his cap, drew his head like a
scared turtle down into his coat collar, and ran for a seat. Hugh and
Carl tucked their caps into their coat pockets and attempted to stroll
nonchalantly down the aisle. They hadn't taken three steps before the
bombardment began. Like their classmate, they ran for safety.

Then some one in the front of the theatre threw a peanut at some one in
the rear. The fight was on! Yelling like madmen, the students stood on
their chairs and hurled peanuts, the front and rear of the house
automatically dividing into enemy camps. When the fight was at its
hottest, three girls entered.

"Wimmen! Wimmen!" As the girls walked down the aisle, infinitely pleased
with their reception, five hundred men stamped in time with their
steps.

No sooner were the girls seated than there was a scramble in one corner,
an excited scuffling of feet. "I've got it!" a boy screamed. He stood on
his chair and held up a live mouse by its tail. There was a shout of
applause and then--"Play catch!"

The boy dropped the writhing mouse into a peanut bag, screwed the open
end tight-closed, and then threw the bag far across the room. Another
boy caught it and threw it, this time over the girls' heads. They
screamed and jumped upon their chairs, holding their skirts, and dancing
up and down in assumed terror. Back over their heads, back and over,
again and again the bagged mouse was thrown while the girls screamed and
the boys roared with delight. Suddenly one of the girls threw up her
arm, caught the bag deftly, held it for a second, and then tossed it
into the rear of the theater.

Cheers of terrifying violence broke loose: "Ray! Ray! Atta girl! Hot
dog! Ray, ray!" And then the lights went out.

"Moosick! Moosick! Moo-_sick_!" The audience stamped and roared,
whistled and howled. "Moosick! We want moosick!"

The pianist, an undergraduate, calmly strolled down the aisle.

"Get a move on!"... "Earn your salary!"... "Give us moosick!"

The pianist paused to thumb his nose casually at the entire audience,
and then amid shouts and hisses sat down at the piano and began to play
"Love Nest."

Immediately the boys began to whistle, and as the comedy was utterly
stupid, they relieved their boredom by whistling the various tunes that
the pianist played until the miserable film flickered out.

Then the "feature" and the fun began. During the stretches of pure
narrative, the boys whistled, but when there was any real action they
talked. The picture was a melodrama of "love and hate," as the
advertisement said.

The boys told the actors what to do; they revealed to them the secrets
of the plot. "She's hiding behind the door, Harold. No, no! Not that
way. Hey, dumbbell--behind the door."... "Catch him, Gloria; he's only
shy!"... "No, that's not him!"

The climactic fight brought shouts of encouragement--to the villain.
"Kill him!"... "Shoot one to his kidneys!"... "Ahhhhh," as the villain
hit the hero in the stomach.... "Muss his hair. Attaboy!"... "Kill the
skunk!" And finally groans of despair when the hero won his inevitable
victory.

But it was the love scenes that aroused the greatest ardor and joy. The
hero was given careful instructions. "Some neckin', Harold!"... "Kiss
her! Kiss her! Ahhh!"... "Harold, Harold, you're getting rough!"...
"She's vamping you, Harold!"... "Stop it; Gloria; he's a good boy." And
so on until the picture ended in the usual close-up of the hero and
heroine silhouetted in a tender embrace against the setting sun. The
boys breathed "Ahhhh" and "Ooooh" ecstatically--and laughed. The
meretricious melodrama did not fool them, but they delighted in its
absurdities.

The lights flashed on and the crowd filed out, "wise-cracking" about the
picture and commenting favorably on the heroine's figure. There were
shouts to this fellow or that fellow to come on over and play bridge,
and suggestions here and there to go to a drug store and get a drink.

Hugh and Carl strolled home over the dark campus, both of them radiant
with excitement, Hugh frankly so.

"Golly, I did enjoy that," he exclaimed. "I never had a better time. It
was sure hot stuff. I don't want to go to the room; let's walk for a
while."

"Yeah, it was pretty good," Carl admitted. "Nope, I can't go walking;
gotta write a letter."

"Who to? The harem?"

Carl hunched his shoulders until his ears touched his coat collar.
"Gettin' cold. Fall's here. Nope, not the harem. My old lady."

Hugh looked at him bewildered. He was finding Carl more and more a
conundrum. He consistently called his mother his old lady, insisted that
she was a damned nuisance--and wrote to her every night. Hugh was
writing to his mother only twice a week. It was very confusing....




CHAPTER V


Capwell Chapel--it bore the pork merchant's name as an eternal memorial
to him--was as impressive inside as out. The stained-glass windows had
been made by a famous New York firm; the altar had been designed by an
even more famous sculptor. The walls, quite improperly, were adorned
with paintings of former presidents, but the largest painting of all--it
was fairly Gargantuan--was of the pork merchant, a large, ruddy
gentleman, whom the artist, a keen observer, had painted
truly--complacently porcine, benevolently smug.

The seniors and juniors sat in the nave, the sophomores on the right
side of the transept, the freshmen on the left. Hugh gazed upward in awe
at the dim recesses of the vaulted ceiling, at the ornately carved choir
where gowned students were quietly seating themselves, at the colored
light streaming through the beautiful windows, at the picture of the
pork merchant. The chapel bells ceased tolling; rich, solemn tones
swelled from the organ.

President Culver in cap and gown, his purple hood falling over his
shoulders, entered followed by his faculty, also gowned and hooded. The
students rose and remained standing until the president and faculty were
seated. The organ sounded a final chord, and then the college chaplain
rose and prayed--very badly. He implored the Lord to look kindly "on
these young men who have come from near and far to drink from this great
fount of learning, this well of wisdom."

The prayer over, the president addressed the students. He was a large,
erect man with iron-gray hair and a rugged intelligent face. Although he
was sixty years old, his body was vigorous and free from extra weight.
He spoke slowly and impressively, choosing his words with care and
enunciating them with great distinctness. His address was for the
freshmen: he welcomed them to Sanford College, to its splendid
traditions, its high ideals, its noble history. He spoke of the famous
men it numbered among its sons, of the work they had done for America
and the world, of the work he hoped future Sanford men, they, the
freshmen, would some day do for America and the world. He mentioned
briefly the boys from Sanford who had died in the World War "to make the
world safe for democracy," and he prayed that their sacrifice had not
been in vain. Finally, he spoke of the chapel service, which the
students were required to attend. He hoped that they would find
inspiration in it, knowledge and strength. He assured them that the
service would always be nonsectarian, that there would never be anything
in it to offend any one of any race, creed, or religion. With a last
exhortation to the freshmen to make the most of their great
opportunities, he ended with the announcement that they would rise and
sing the sixty-seventh hymn.

Hugh was deeply impressed by the speech but disturbed by the students.
From where he sat he got an excellent view of the juniors and seniors.
The seniors, who sat in the front of the nave, seemed to be paying
fairly good attention; but the juniors--many of them, at least--paid no
attention at all. Some of them were munching apples, some doughnuts, and
many of them were reading "The Sanford News," the college's daily paper.
Some of the juniors talked during the president's address, and once he
noticed four of them doubled up as if overcome by laughter. To him the
service was a beautiful and impressive occasion. He could not understand
the conduct of the upper-classmen. It seemed, to put it mildly,
irreverent.

Every one, however, sang the doxology with great vigor, some of the boys
lifting up a "whisky" tenor that made the chapel ring, and to which Hugh
happily added his own clear tenor. The benediction was pronounced by the
chaplain, the seniors marched out slowly in twos, while the other
students and the faculty stood in their places; then the president,
followed by the faculty, passed out of the great doors. When the back of
the last faculty gown had disappeared, the under-classmen broke for the
door, pushing each other aside, swearing when a toe was stepped on,
yelling to each other, some of them joyously chanting the doxology. Hugh
was caught in the rush and carried along with the mob, feeling ashamed
and distressed; this was no way to leave a church.

Once outside, however, he had no time to think of the chapel service; he
had five minutes in which to get to his first class, and the building
was across the campus, a good two minutes' walk. He patted his cap to be
sure that it was firmly on the back of his head, clutched his note-book,
and ran as hard as he could go, the strolling upper-classmen, whom he
passed at top speed, grinning after him in tolerant amusement.

Hugh was the first one in the class-room and wondered in a moment of
panic if he was in the right place. He sat down dubiously and looked at
his watch. Four minutes left. He would wait two, and then if nobody came
he would--he gasped; he couldn't imagine what he would do. How could he
find the right class-room? Maybe his class didn't come at this hour at
all. Suppose he and Carl had made a mistake. If they had, his whole
schedule was probably wrong. "Oh, golly," he thought, feeling pitifully
weak, "won't that be hell? What can I do?"

At that moment a countrified-looking youth entered, looking as scared as
Hugh felt. His face was pale, and his voice trembled as he asked
timidly, "Do you know if this is Section Three of Math One?"

Hugh was immediately strengthened. "I think so," he replied. "Anyhow,
let's wait and find out."

The freshman sighed in huge relief, took out a not too clean
handkerchief, and mopped his face. "Criminy!" he exclaimed as he
wriggled down the aisle to a seat by Hugh, "I was sure worried. I
thought I was in the wrong building, though I was sure that my adviser
had told me positively that Math was in Matthew Six."

"I guess we're all right," Hugh comforted him as two other freshmen,
also looking dubious, entered. They were followed by four more, and then
by a stampeding group, all of them pop-eyed, all of them in a rush. In
the next minute five freshmen dashed in and then dashed out again,
utterly bewildered, obviously terrified, and not knowing where to go or
what to do. "Is this Math One, Section Three?" every man demanded of the
room as he entered; and every one yelled, "Yes," or, "I think so."

Just as the bell rang at ten minutes after the hour, the instructor
entered. It was Professor Kane.

"This is Mathematics One, Section Three," Kane announced in a dry voice.
"If there is any one here who does not belong here, he will please
leave." Nobody moved; so he shuffled some cards in his hand and asked
the men to answer to the roll-call.

"Adams, J.H."

"Present, sir."

Kane looked up and frowned. "Say 'here,'" he said severely. "This is not
a grammar-school."

"Yes, sir," stuttered Adams, his face first white then purple. "Here,
sir."

"'Here' will do; there is no need of the 'sir.' Allsop, K.E."

"Here"--in a very faint voice.

"Speak up!"

"Here." This time a little louder.

And so it went, hardly a man escaping without some admonishment. Hugh's
throat went dry; his tongue literally stuck to the roof of his mouth: he
was sure that he wouldn't be able to say "Here" when it came his turn,
and he could feel his heart pounding in dreadful anticipation.

"Carver, H.M."

"Here!"

There! it was out! Or had he really said it?

He looked at the professor in terror, but Kane was already calling,
"Dana, R.T." Hugh sank back in his chair; he was trembling.

Kane announced the text-book, and when Hugh caught the word
"trigonometry" he actually thrilled with joy. He had had trig in high
school. Whoops! Would he hit Math I in the eye? He'd knock it for a
goal.... Then conscience spoke. Oughtn't he to tell Kane that he had
already had trig? He guessed quite rightly that Kane had not understood
his high-school credentials, which had given him credit for "advanced
mathematics." Kane had taken it for granted that that was advanced
algebra. Hugh felt that he ought to explain the mistake, but fear of the
arid, impersonal man restrained him. Kane had told him to take Math I;
and Kane was law.

Unlike most of Hugh's instructors, Kane kept the class the full hour the
first day, seating them in alphabetical order--he had to repeat the
performance three times during the week as new men entered the
class--lecturing them on the need of doing their problems carefully and
accurately, and discoursing on the value of mathematics, trigonometry in
particular, in the study of science and engineering. Hugh was not
interested in science, engineering, or mathematics, but he listened
carefully, trying hard to follow Kane's cold discourse. At the end of
the hour he told his neighbor as they left the room that he guessed that
Professor Kane knew an awful lot, and his neighbor agreed with him.

Hugh's other instructors proved less impressive than Kane; in fact, Mr.
Alling, the instructor in Latin, was altogether disconcerting.

"Plautus," he told the class, "wrote comedies, farces--not exercises in
translation. He was also, my innocents, occasionally naughty--oh, really
naughty. What's worse, he used slang, common every-day slang--the kind
of stuff that you and I talk. Now, I have an excellent vocabulary of
slang, obscenity, and profanity; and you are going to hear most of it.
Think of the opportunity. Don't think that I mean just 'damn' and
'hell.' They are good for a laugh in a theater any day, but Plautus was
not restrained by our modern conventions. _You_ will confine yourselves,
please, to English undefiled, but I shall speak the modern equivalent to
a Roman gutter-pup's language whenever necessary. You will find this
course very illuminating--in some ways. And, who knows? you may learn
something not only about Latin but about Rome."

Hugh thought Mr. Alling was rather flippant and lacking in dignity.
Professor Kane was more like a college teacher. Before the term was out
he hated Kane with an intensity that astonished him, and he looked
forward to his Latin classes with an eagerness of which he was almost
ashamed. Plautus in the Alling free and colloquial translations was
enormously funny.

Professor Hartley, who gave the history lectures, talked in a bass
monotone and never seemed to pause for breath. His words came in a slow
steady stream that never rose nor fell nor paused--until the bell rang.
The men in the back of the room slept. Hugh was seated near the front;
so he drew pictures in his note-book. The English instructor talked
about punctuation as if it were very unpleasant but almost religiously
important; and what the various lecturers in general science talked
about--ten men gave the course--Hugh never knew. In after years all that
he could remember about the course was that one man spoke broken English
and that a professor of physics had made huge bulbs glow with marvelous
colors.

Hugh had one terrifying experience before he finally got settled to his
work. It occurred the second day of classes. He was comfortably seated
in what he thought was his English class--he had come in just as the
bell rang--when the instructor announced that it was a class in French.
What was he to do? What would the instructor do if he got up and left
the room? What would happen if he didn't report at his English class?
What would happen to him for coming into his English class late? These
questions staggered his mind. He was afraid to stay in the French class.
Cautiously he got up and began to tiptoe to the door.

"Wrong room?" the instructor asked pleasantly.

Hugh flushed. "Yes, sir." He stopped dead still, not knowing what to do
next.

He was a typical rattled freshman, and the class, which was composed of
sophomores, laughed. Hugh, angry and humiliated, started for the door,
but the instructor held up a hand that silenced the class; then he
motioned for Hugh to come to his desk.

"What class are you looking for?"

"English One, sir, Section Seven." He held out his schedule card,
reassured by the instructor's kindly manner.

The instructor looked at the card and then consulted a printed schedule.

"Oh," he said, "your adviser made a mistake. He got you into the wrong
group list. You belong in Sanders Six."

"Thank you, sir." Hugh spoke so softly that the waiting class did not
hear him, but the instructor smiled at the intensity of his thanks. As
he left the room, he knew that every one was looking at him; his legs
felt as if they were made of wood. It wasn't until he had closed the
door that his knee-joints worked naturally. But the worst was still
ahead of him. He had to go to his English class in Sanders 6. He ran
across the campus, his heart beating wildly, his hands desperately
clenched. When he reached Sanders 6, he found three other freshmen
grouped before the door.

"Is this English One, Section Seven?" one asked tremulously.

"I think so," whispered the second. "Do you know?" he asked, turning to
Hugh.

"Yes; I am almost sure."

They stood there looking at each other, no one quite daring to enter
Sanders 6, no one quite daring to leave. Suddenly the front door of the
building slammed. A bareheaded youth rushed up the stairs. He was a
repeater; that is, a man who had failed the course the preceding year
and was taking it over again. He brushed by the scared freshmen, opened
the door, and strode into Sanders 6, closing the door behind him.

The freshmen looked at each other, and then the one nearest the door
opened it. The four of them filed in silently.

The class looked up. "Sit in the back of the room," said the instructor.

And that was all there was to that. In his senior year Hugh remembered
the incident and wondered at his terror. He tried to remember why he had
been so badly frightened. He couldn't; there didn't seem to be any
reason at all.




CHAPTER VI


About a week after the opening of college, Hugh returned to Surrey Hall
one night feeling unusually virtuous and happy. He had worked
religiously at the library until it had closed at ten, and he had been
in the mood to study. His lessons for the next day were all prepared,
and prepared well. He had strolled across the moon-lit campus, buoyant
and happy. Some one was playing the organ in the dark chapel; he paused
to listen. Two students passed him, humming softly,


                "Sanford, Sanford, mother of men,
                 Love us, guard us, hold us true...."


The dormitories were dim masses broken by rectangles of soft yellow
light. Somewhere a banjo twanged. Another student passed.

"Hello, Carver," he said pleasantly. "Nice night."

"Oh, hello, Jones. It sure is."

The simple greeting completed his happiness. He felt that he belonged,
that Sanford, the "mother of men," had taken him to her heart. The music
in the chapel swelled, lyric, passionate--up! up! almost a cry. The
moonlight was golden between the heavy shadows of the elms. Tears came
into the boy's eyes; he was melancholy with joy.

He climbed the stairs of Surrey slowly, reluctant to reach his room and
Carl's flippancy. He passed an open door and glanced at the men inside
the room.

"Hi, Hugh. Come in and bull a while."

"Not to-night, thanks." He moved on down the hall, feeling a vague
resentment; his mood had been broken, shattered.

The door opposite his own room was slightly open. A freshman lived
there, Herbert Morse, a queer chap with whom Carl and Hugh had succeeded
in scraping up only the slightest acquaintance. He was a big fellow,
fully six feet, husky and quick. The football coach said that he had the
makings of a great half-back, but he had already been fired off the
squad because of his irregularity in reporting for practice. Except for
what the boys called his stand-offishness--some of them said that he was
too damned high-hat--he was extremely attractive. He had red, almost
copper-colored, hair, and an exquisite skin, as delicate as a child's.
His features were well carved, his nose slightly aquiline--a magnificent
looking fellow, almost imperious; or as Hugh once said to Carl, "Morse
looks kinda noble."

As Hugh placed his hand on the door-knob of No 19, he heard something
that sounded suspiciously like a sob from across the hall. He paused and
listened. He was sure that he could hear some one crying.

"Wonder what's wrong," he thought, instantly disturbed and sympathetic.

He crossed the hall and tapped lightly on Morse's door. There was no
answer; nor was there any when he tapped a second time. For a moment he
was abashed, and then he pushed open the door and entered Morse's room.

In the far corner Morse was sitting at his, desk, his head buried in his
arms, his shoulders shaking. He was crying fiercely, terribly; at times
his whole body jerked in the violence of his sobbing.

Hugh stood by the door embarrassed and rather frightened. Morse's grief
brought a lump to his throat. He had never seen any one cry like that
before. Something had to be done. But what could he do? He had no right
to intrude on Morse, but he couldn't let the poor fellow go on suffering
like that. As he stood there hesitant, shaken, Morse buried his head
deeper in his arms, moaned convulsively, twisting and trembling after a
series of sobs that seemed to tear themselves from him. That was too
much for Hugh. He couldn't stand it. Some force outside of him sent him
across the room to Morse. He put his hand on a quivering shoulder and
said gently:

"What is it, Morse? What's the matter?"

Morse ran his hand despairingly through his red hair, shook his head,
and made no answer.

"Come on, old man; buck up." Hugh's voice trembled; it was husky with
sympathy. "Tell me about it. Maybe I can help."

Then Morse looked up, his face stained with tears, his eyes inflamed,
almost desperate. He stared at Hugh wonderingly. For an instant he was
angry at the intrusion, but his anger passed at once. He could not miss
the tenderness and sympathy in Hugh's face; and the boy's hand was still
pressing with friendly insistence on his shoulder. There was something
so boyishly frank, so clean and honest about Hugh that his irritation
melted into confidence; and he craved a confidant passionately.

"Shut the door," he said dully, and reached into his trousers pocket for
his handkerchief. He mopped his face and eyes vigorously while Hugh was
closing the door, and then blew his nose as if he hated it. But the
tears continued to come, and all during his talk with Hugh he had to
pause occasionally to dry his eyes.

Hugh stood awkwardly in the middle of the rug, not knowing whether to
sit down or not. Morse was clutching his handkerchief in his hand and
staring at the floor. Finally he spoke up.

"Sit down," he said in a dead voice, "there."

Hugh sank into the chair Morse indicated and then gripped his hands
together. He felt weak and frightened, and absolutely unable to say
anything. But Morse saved him the trouble.

"I suppose you think I am an awful baby," he began, his voice thick with
tears, "but I just can't help it. I--I just can't help it. I don't want
to cry, but I do." And then he added defiantly, "Go ahead and think I'm
a baby if you want to."

"I don't think you're a baby," Hugh said softly; "I'm just sorry; that's
all.... I hope I can help." He smiled shyly, hopefully.

His smile conquered Morse. "You're a good kid, Carver," he cried
impulsively. "A darn good kid. I like you, and I'm going to tell you all
about it. And I--I--I won't care if you laugh."

"I won't laugh," Hugh promised, relieved to think that there was a
possibility of laughing. The trouble couldn't be so awfully bad.

Morse blew his nose, stuck his handkerchief into his pocket, pulled it
out again and dabbed his eyes, returned it to his pocket, and suddenly
stood up.

"I'm homesick!" he blurred out. "I'm--I'm homesick, damned homesick.
I've been homesick ever since I arrived. I--I just can't stand it."

For an instant Hugh did have a wild desire to laugh. Part of the desire
was caused by nervous relief, but part of it was caused by what seemed
to him the absurdity of the situation: a big fellow like Morse
blubbering, bawling for home and mother!

"You can't know," Morse went on, "how awful it is--awful! I want to cry
all the time. I can't listen in classes. A prof asked me a question
to-day, and I didn't know what he had been talking about. He asked me
what he had said. I had to say I didn't know. The whole class laughed,
and the prof asked me why I had come to college. God! I nearly died."

Hugh's sympathy was all captured again. He knew that he _would_ die if
he ever made a fool of himself in the class-room.

"Gosh!" he exclaimed. "What did you say?"

"Nothing. I couldn't think of anything. For a minute I thought that my
head was going to bust. He quit razzing me and I tried to pay attention,
but I couldn't; all I could do was think of home. Lord! I wish I was
there!" He mopped at his eyes and paced up and down the room nervously.

"Oh, you'll get over that," Hugh said comfortingly. "Pretty soon you'll
get to know lots of fellows, and then you won't mind about home."

"That's what I keep telling myself, but it don't work. I can't eat or
sleep. I can't study. I can't do anything. I tell you I've got to go
home. I've _got_ to!" This last with desperate emphasis.

Hugh smiled. "You're all wrong," he asserted positively. "You're just
lonely; that's all. I bet that you'll be crazy about college in a
month--same as the rest of us. When you feel blue, come in and see
Peters and me. We'll make you grin; Peters will, anyway. You can't be
blue around him."

Morse sat down. "You don't understand. I'm not lonely. It isn't that. I
could talk to fellows all day long if I wanted to. I don't want to talk
to 'em. I can't. There's just one person that I want to talk to, and
that's my mother." He shot the word "mother" out defiantly and glared at
Hugh, silently daring him to laugh, which Hugh had sense enough not to
do, although he wanted to strongly. The great big baby, wanting his
mother! Why, he wanted his mother, too, but he didn't cry about it.

"That's all right," he said reassuringly; "you'll see her Christmas
vacation, and that isn't very long off."

"I want to see her now!" Morse jumped to his feet and raised his
clenched hands above his head. "Now!" he roared. "Now! I've got to. I'm
going home on the midnight." He whirled about to his desk and began to
pull open the drawers, piling their contents on the top.

"Here!" Hugh rushed to him and clutched his arms. "Don't do that." Morse
struggled, angry at the restraining hands, ready to strike them off.
Hugh had a flash of inspiration. "Think how disappointed your mother
will be," he cried, hanging on to Morse's arms; "think of her."

Morse ceased struggling. "She will be disappointed," he admitted
miserably. "What can I do?" There was a world of despair in his
question.

Hugh pushed him into the desk-chair and seated himself on the edge of
the desk. "I'll tell you," he said. He talked for half an hour, cheering
Morse, assuring him that his homesickness would pass away, offering to
study with him. At first Morse paid little attention, but finally he
quit sniffing and looked up, real interest in his face. When Hugh got a
weak smile out of him, he felt that his work had been done. He jumped
off the desk, leaned over to slap Morse on the back, and told him that
he was a good egg but a damn fool.

Morse grinned. "You're a good egg yourself," he said gratefully. "You've
saved my life."

Hugh was pleased and blushed. "You're full of bull.... Remember, we do
Latin at ten to-morrow." He opened the door. "Good night."

"Good night." And Hugh heard as he closed the door. "Thanks a lot."

When he opened his own door, he found Carl sitting before a blazing log
fire. There was no other light in the room. Carl had written his nightly
letter to the "old lady," and he was a little homesick himself--softened
into a tender and pensive mood. He did not move as Hugh sat down in a
big chair on the other side of the hearth and said softly, "Thinking?"

"Un-huh. Where you been?"

"Across the hall in Morse's room." Then as Carl looked up in surprise,
he told him of his experience with their red-headed neighbor. "He'll get
over it," he concluded confidently. "He's just been lonely."

Carl puffed contemplatively at his pipe for a few minutes before
replying. Hugh waited, watching the slender boy stretched out in a big
chair before the fire, his ankles crossed, his face gentle and boyish in
the ruddy, flickering light. The shadows, heavy and wavering, played
magic with the room; it was vast, mysterious.

"No," said Carl, pausing again to puff his pipe; "no, he won't get over
it. He'll go home."

"Aw, shucks. A big guy like that isn't going to stay a baby all his
life." Hugh was frankly derisive. "Soon as he gets to know a lot of
fellows, he'll forget home and mother."

Carl smiled vaguely, his eyes dreamy as he gazed into the hypnotizing
flames. The mask of sophistication had slipped off his face; he was
pleasantly in the control of a gentle mood, a mood that erased the last
vestige of protective coloring.

He shook his head slowly. "You don't understand, Hugh. Morse is sick,
_sick_--not lonesome. He's got something worse than flu. Nobody can
stand what he's got."

Hugh looked at him in bewilderment. This was a new Carl, some one he
hadn't met before. Gone was the slang flippancy, the hard roughness.
Even his voice was softened.

Carl knocked his pipe empty on the knob of an andiron, sank deeper into
his chair, and began to speak slowly.

"I think I'm going to tell you a thing or two about myself. We've got to
room together, and I--well, I like you. You're a good egg, but you don't
get me at all. I guess you've never run up against anybody like me
before." He paused. Hugh said nothing, afraid to break into Carl's mood.
He was intensely curious. He leaned forward and watched Carl, who was
staring dreamily into the fire.

"I told you once, I think," he continued, "that my old man had left us a
lot of jack. That's true. We're rich, awfully rich. I have my own
account and can spend as much as I like. The sky's the limit. What I
didn't tell you is that we're _nouveau riche_--no class at all. My old
man made all his money the first year of the war. He was a
commission-merchant, a middleman. Money just rolled in, I guess. He
bought stocks with it, and they boomed; and he had sense enough to sell
them when they were at the top. Six years ago we didn't have hardly
anything. Now we're rich."

"My old man was a good scout, but he didn't have much education; neither
has the old lady. Both of 'em went through grammar-school; that's all."

"Well, they knew they weren't real folks, not regular people, and they
wanted me to be. See? That's why they sent me to Kane. Well, Kane isn't
strong for _nouveau riche_ kids, not by a damn sight. At first old
Simmonds--he's the head master--wouldn't take me, said that he didn't
have room; but my old man begged and begged, so finally Simmonds said
all right."

Again he paused, and Hugh waited. Carl was speaking so softly that he
had trouble in hearing him, but somehow he didn't dare to ask him to
speak louder.

"I sha'n't forget the day," Carl went on, "that the old man left me at
Kane. I was scared, and I didn't want to stay. But he made me; he said
that Kane would make a gentleman out of me. I was homesick, homesick as
hell. I know how Morse feels. I tried to run away three times, but they
caught me and brought me back. Cry? I bawled all the time when I was
alone. I couldn't sleep for weeks; I just laid in bed and bawled. God!
it was awful. The worst of it was the meals. I didn't know how to eat
right, you see, and the master who sat at the table with our form would
correct me. I used to want to die, and sometimes I would say that I was
sick and didn't want any food so that I wouldn't have to go to meals.
The fellows razzed the life out of me; some of 'em called me Paddy. The
reason I came here to Sanford was that no Kane fellows come here. They
go mostly to Williams, but some of 'em go to Yale or Princeton.

"Well, I had four years of that, and I was homesick the whole four
years. Oh, I don't mean that they kept after me all the time--that was
just the first few months--but they never really accepted me. I never
felt at home. Even when I was with a bunch of them, I felt lonesome....
And they never made a gentleman out of me, though my old lady thinks
they did."

"You're crazy," Hugh interrupted indignantly. "You're as much a
gentleman as anybody in college."

Carl smiled and shook his head. "No, you don't understand. You're a
gentleman, but I'm not. Oh, I know all the tricks, the parlor stunts.
Four years at Kane taught me those, but they're just tricks to me. I
don't know just how to explain it--but I know that you're a gentleman
and I'm not."

"You're just plain bug-house. You make me feel like a fish. Why, I'm
just from a country high school. I'm not in your class." Hugh sat up
and leaned eagerly toward Carl, gesticulating excitedly.

"As if that made any difference," Carl replied, his voice sharp with
scorn. "You see, I'm a bad egg. I drink and gamble and pet. I haven't
gone the limit yet on--on account of my old lady--but I will."

Hugh was relieved. He had wondered more than once during the past week
"just how far Carl had gone." Several times Carl had suggested by sly
innuendos that there wasn't anything that he hadn't done, and Hugh had
felt a slight disapproval--and considerable envy. His own standards were
very high, very strict, but he was ashamed to reveal them.

"I've never gone the limit either," he confessed shyly.

Carl threw back his head and laughed. "You poor fish; don't you suppose
I know that?" he exclaimed.

"How did you know?" Hugh demanded indignantly. "I might've. Why, I was
out with a girl just before I left home and--"

"You kissed her," Carl concluded for him. "I don't know how I knew, but
I did. You're just kinda pure; that's all. I'm not pure at all; I'm just
a little afraid--and I keep thinkin' of my old lady. I've started to
several times, but I've always thought of her and quit."

He sat silent for a minute or two and then continued more gently. "My
old lady never came to Kane. She never will come here, either. She wants
to give me a real chance. See? She knows she isn't a lady--but--but, oh,
God, Hugh, she's white, white as hell. I guess I think more of her than
all the rest of the world put together. That's why I write to her every
night. She writes to me every day, too. The letters have mistakes in
them, but--but they keep me straight. That is, they have so far. I know,
though, that some night I'll be out with a bag and get too much liquor
in me--and then good-by, virginity."

"You're crazy, Carl. You know you won't." Carl rose from the chair and
stretched hugely. "You're a good egg, Hugh," he said in the midst of a
yawn, "but you're a damn fool."

Hugh started. That was just what he had said to Morse.

       *       *       *       *       *

He never caught Carl in a confidential mood again. The next morning he
was his old flippant self, swearing because he had to study his Latin,
which wasn't "of any damned use to anybody."

In the following weeks Hugh religiously clung to Morse, helped him with
his work, went to the movies with him, inveigled him into going on
several long walks. Morse was more cheerful and almost pathetically
grateful. One day, however, Hugh found an unstamped letter on the
floor. He opened it wonderingly.


       Dear Hugh [he read]. You've been awfully good to me but
       I can't stand it. I'm going home to-day. Give my regards
       to Peters. Thanks for all you've done for me.

                                                BERT MORSE.





CHAPTER VII


For a moment after reading Morse's letter Hugh was genuinely sorry, but
almost immediately he felt irritated and hurt.

He handed the letter to Carl, who entered just as he finished reading
it, and exploded: "The simp! And after I wasted so much time on him."

Carl read the letter. "I told you so." He smiled impishly. "You were the
wise boy; you _knew_ that he would get over it."

Hugh should really have felt grateful to Morse. It was only a feeling of
responsibility for him that had made Hugh prepare his own lessons. Day
after day he had studied with Morse in order to cheer him up; and that
was all the studying he had done. Latin and history had little
opportunity to claim his interest in competition with the excitement
around him.

Crossing the campus for the first few weeks of college was an adventure
for every freshman. He did not know when he would be seized by a howling
group of sophomores and forced to make an ass of himself for their
amusement. Sometimes he was required to do "esthetic dancing," sometimes
to sing, or, what was more common, to make a speech. And no matter how
hard he tried, the sophomores were never pleased. If he danced, they
laughed at him, guyed him unmercifully, called attention to his legs,
his awkwardness, urged him to go faster, insisted that he get some
"pash" into it. If he sang, and the frightened freshman usually sang off
key, they interrupted him after a few notes, told him to sing something
else, interrupted that, and told him "for God's sake" to dance. The
speech-making, however, provided the most fun, especially if the
freshman was cleverer than his captors. Then there was a battle of wits,
and if the freshman too successfully defeated his opponents, he was
dropped into a watering-trough that had stood on the campus for more
than a century. Of justice there was none, but of sport there was a
great plenty. The worst scared of the freshmen really enjoyed the
experience. By a strange sort of inverted logic, he felt that he was
something of a hero; at least, for a brief time he had occupied the
public eye. He had been initiated; he was a Sanford man.

One freshman, however, found those two weeks harrowing. That was Merton
Billings, the fat man of the class. Day after day he was captured by the
sophomores and commanded to dance. He was an earnest youth and entirely
without a sense of humor. Dancing to him was not only hard work but
downright wicked. He was a member of the Epworth League, and he took his
membership seriously. Even David, he remembered, had "got in wrong"
because he danced; and he had no desire to emulate David. Within two
days the sophomores discovered his religious ardor, his horror of
drinking, smoking, and dancing. So they made him dance while they howled
with glee at his bobbing stomach; his short, staggering legs; his red
jowls, jigging and jouncing; his pale blue eyes, protruding excitedly
from their sockets; his lips pressed tight together, periodically
popping open for breath. He was very funny, very angry, and very much
ashamed. Every night he prayed that he might be forgiven his sin. A
month later when the intensity of his hatred had subsided somewhat, he
remembered to his horror that he had not prayed that his tormentors be
forgiven their even greater sin. He rectified the error without delay,
not neglecting to ask that the error be forgiven, too.

Hugh was forced to sing, to dance, and to make a speech, but he escaped
the watering-trough. He thought the fellows were darned nice to let him
off, and they thought that he was too darned nice to be ducked. Although
Hugh didn't suspect it, he was winning immediate popularity. His shy,
friendly smile, his natural modesty, and his boyish enthusiasm were
making a host of friends for him. He liked the "initiations" on the
campus, but he did not like some of them in the dormitories. He didn't
mind being pulled out of bed and shoved under a cold shower. He took a
cold shower every morning, and if the sophomores wanted to give him
another one at night--all right, he was willing. He had to confess that
"Eliza Crossing the Ice" had been enormous fun. The freshmen were
commanded to appear in the common room in their oldest clothes. Then all
of them, the smallest lad excepted, got down on their hands and knees,
forming a circle. The smallest lad, "Eliza," was given a big bucket full
of water. He jumped upon the back of the man nearest to him and ran
wildly around the circle, leaping from back to back, the bucket swinging
crazily, the water splashing in every direction and over everybody.

Hugh liked such "stunts," and he liked putting on a show with three
other freshmen for the amusement of their peers, but he did object to
the vulgarity and cruelty of much that was done.

The first order the sophomores often gave was, "Strip, freshman." Just
why the freshmen had to be naked before they performed, Hugh did not
know, but there was something phallic about the proceedings that
disgusted him. Like every athlete, he thought nothing of nudity, but he
soon discovered that some of the freshmen were intensely conscious of
it. True, a few months in the gymnasium cured them of that
consciousness, but at first many of them were eternally wrapping towels
about themselves in the gymnasium, and they took a shower as if it were
an act of public shame. The sophomores recognized the timidity that some
of the freshmen had in revealing their bodies, and they made full
capital of it. The shyer the freshman, the more pointed their remarks,
the more ingeniously nasty their tricks.

"I don't mind the razzing myself," Hugh told Carl after one particularly
strenuous evening, "but I don't like the things they said to poor little
Wilkins. And when they stripped 'em and made Wilkins read that dirty
story to Culver, I wanted to fight"

"It was kinda rotten," Carl agreed, "but it was funny."

"It wasn't funny at all," Hugh said angrily.

Carl looked at him in surprise. It was the first time that he had seen
him aroused.

"It wasn't funny at all," Hugh repeated; "it was just filthy. I'd 'a'
just about died if I'd 'a' been in Wilkins's place. The poor kid!
They're too damn dirty, these sophomores. I didn't think that college
men could be so dirty. Why, not even the bums at home would think of
such things. And I'm telling you right now that there are three of those
guys that I'm layin' for. Just wait till the class rush. I'm going to
get Adams, and then I'm going to get Cooper--yes, I'm going to get him
even if he is bigger'n me--and I'm going to get Dodge. I didn't say
anything when they made me wash my face in the toilet bowl, but, by God!
I'm going to get 'em for it."

Three weeks later he made good this threat. He was a clever boxer, and
he succeeded in separating each of the malefactors from the fighting
mob. He would have been completely nonplussed if he could have heard
Adams and Dodge talking in their room after the rush.

"Who gave you the black eye?" Adams asked Dodge.

"That freshman Carver," he replied, touching the eye gingerly. "Who gave
you that welt on the chin?"

"Carver! And, say, he beat Hi Cooper to a pulp. He's a mess."

They looked at each other and burst out laughing.

"Lord," said Dodge, "I'm going to pick my freshmen next time. Who'd take
a kid with a smile like his to be a scrapper? He's got the nicest smile
in college. Why, he looks meek as a lamb."

"You never can tell," remarked Adams, rubbing his chin ruefully.

Dodge was examining his eye in the mirror. "No, you never can tell....
Damn it, I'm going to have to get a beefsteak or something for this lamp
of mine."

"Say, he ought to be a good man for the fraternity," Adams said
suddenly.

"Who?" Dodge's eye was absorbing his entire attention.

"Carver, of course. He ought to make a damn good man."

"Yeah--you bet. We've got to rush him sure."




CHAPTER VIII


The dormitory initiations had more than angered Hugh; they had
completely upset his mental equilibrium: his every ideal of college
swayed and wabbled. He wasn't a prig, but he had come to Sanford with
very definite ideas about the place, and those ideas were already groggy
from the unmerciful pounding they were receiving.

His father was responsible for his illusions, if one may call them
illusions. Mr. Carver was a shy, sensitive man well along in his
fifties, with a wife twelve years his junior. He pretended to cultivate
his small farm in Merrytown, but as a matter of fact he lived off of a
comfortable income left him by his very capable father. He spent most of
his time reading the eighteenth-century essayists, John Donne's poetry,
the "Atlantic Monthly," the "Boston Transcript," and playing Mozart on
his violin. He did not understand his wife and was thoroughly afraid of
his son; Hugh had an animal vigor that at times almost terrified him.

At his wife's insistence he had a talk with Hugh the night before the
boy left for college. Hugh had wanted to run when he met his father in
the library after dinner for that talk. He loved the gentle, gray-haired
man with the fine, delicate features and soft voice. He had often wished
that he knew his father. Mr. Carver was equally eager to know Hugh, but
he had no idea of how to go about getting acquainted with his son.

They sat on opposite sides of the fireplace, and Mr. Carver gazed
thoughtfully at the boy. Why hadn't Betty had this talk with Hugh? She
knew him so much better than he did; they were more like brother and
sister than mother and son. Why, Hugh called her Betty half the time,
and she seemed to understand him perfectly.

Hugh waited silently. Mr. Carver ran a thin hand through his hair and
then sharply desisted; he mustn't let the boy know that he was nervous.
Then he settled his horn-rimmed pince-nez more firmly on his nose and
felt in his waistcoat for a cigar. Why didn't Hugh say something? He
snipped the end of the cigar with a silver knife. Slowly he lighted the
cigar, inhaled once or twice, coughed mildly, and finally found his
voice.

"Well, Hugh," he said in his gentle way.

"Well, Dad." Hugh grinned sheepishly. Then they both started; Hugh had
never called his father Dad before. He thought of him that way always,
but he could never bring himself to dare anything but the more formal
Father. In his embarrassment he had forgotten himself.

"I--I--I'm sorry, sir," he stuttered, flushing painfully.

Mr. Carver laughed to hide his own embarrassment. "That's all right,
Hugh." His smile was very kindly. "Let it be Dad. I think I like it
better."

"That's fine!" Hugh exclaimed.

The tension was broken, and Mr. Carver began to give the dreaded talk.

"I hardly know what to say to you, Hugh," he began, "on the eve of your
going away to college. There is so much that you ought to know, and I
have no idea of how much you know already."

Hugh thought of all the smutty stories he had heard--and told.
Instinctively he knew that his father referred to what a local doctor
called "the facts of life."

He hung his head and said gruffly, "I guess I know a good deal--Dad."

"That's splendid!" Mr. Carver felt the full weight of a father's
responsibilities lifted from his shoulders. "I believe Dr. Hanson gave
you a talk at school about--er, sex, didn't he?"

"Yes, sir." Hugh was picking out the design in the rug with the toe of
his shoe and at the same time unconsciously pinching his leg. He pinched
so hard that he afterward found a black and blue spot, but he never
knew how it got there.

"Excellent thing, excellent thing, these talks by medical men." He was
beginning to feel at ease. "Excellent thing. I am glad that you are so
well informed; you are old enough."

Hugh wasn't well informed; he was pathetically ignorant. Most of what he
knew had come from the smutty stories, and he often did not understand
the stories that he laughed at most heartily. He was consumed with
curiosity.

"If there is anything you want to know, don't hesitate to ask," his
father continued. He had a moment of panic lest Hugh would ask
something, but the boy merely shook his head--and pinched his leg.

Mr. Carver puffed his cigar in great relief. "Well," he continued, "I
don't want to give you much advice, but your mother feels that I ought
to tell you a little more about college before you leave. As I have told
you before, Sanford is a splendid place, a--er, a splendid place. Fine
old traditions and all that sort of thing. Splendid place. You will find
a wonderful faculty, wonderful. Most of the professors I had are gone,
but I am sure that the new ones are quite as good. Your opportunities
will be enormous, and I am sure that you will take advantage of them. We
have been very proud of your high school record, your mother and I, and
we know that you will do quite as well in college. By the way, I hope
you take a course in the eighteenth-century essayists; you will find
them very stimulating--Addison especially.

"I--er, your mother feels that I ought to say something about the
dissipations of college. I--I'm sure that I don't know what to say. I
suppose that there are young men in college who dissipate--remember that
I knew one or two--but certainly most of them are gentlemen. Crude
men--vulgarians do not commonly go to college. Vulgarity has no place in
college. You may, I presume, meet some men not altogether admirable, but
it will not be necessary for you to know them. Now, as to the
fraternity...."

Hugh forgot to pinch his leg and looked up with avid interest in his
face. The Nu Deltas!

Mr. Carver leaned forward to stir the fire with a brass poker before he
continued. Then he settled back in his chair and smoked comfortably. He
was completely at ease now. The worst was over.

"I have written to the Nu Deltas about you and told them that I hoped
that they would find you acceptable, as I am sure they will. As a
legacy, you will be among the first considered." For an hour more he
talked about the fraternity. Hugh, his embarrassment swallowed by his
interest, eagerly asking questions. His father's admiration for the
fraternity was second only to his admiration for the college, and
before the evening was over he had filled Hugh with an idolatry for
both.

He left his father that night feeling closer to him than he ever had
before. He was going to be a college man like his father--perhaps a Nu
Delta, too. He wished that they had got chummy before. When he went to
bed, he lay awake dreaming, thinking sometimes of Helen Simpson and of
how he had kissed her that afternoon, but more often of Sanford and Nu
Delta. He was so deeply grateful to his father for talking to him
frankly and telling him everything about college. He was darned lucky to
have a father who was a college grad and could put him wise. It was
pretty tough on the fellows whose fathers had never been to college.
Poor fellows, they didn't know the ropes the way he did....

He finally fell off to sleep, picturing himself in the doorway of the Nu
Delta house welcoming his father to a reunion.

That talk was returning to Hugh repeatedly. He wondered if Sanford had
changed since his father's day or if his father had just forgotten what
college was like. Everything seemed so different from what he had been
told to expect. Perhaps he was just soft and some of the fellows weren't
as crude as he thought they were.




CHAPTER IX


Hugh was by no means continuously depressed; as a matter of fact, most
of the time he was agog with delight, especially over the rallies that
were occurring with increasing frequency as the football season
progressed. Sometimes the rallies were carefully prepared ceremonies
held in the gymnasium; sometimes they were entirely spontaneous.

A group of men would rush out of a dormitory or fraternity house
yelling, "Peerade, peerade!" Instantly every one within hearing would
drop his books--or his cards--and rush to the yelling group, which would
line up in fours and begin circling the campus, the line ever getting
longer as more men came running out of the dormitories and fraternity
houses. On, on they would go, arm in arm, dancing, singing Sanford
songs, past every dormitory on the campus, past every fraternity
house--pausing occasionally to give a cheer, always, however, keeping
one goal in mind, the fraternity house where the team lived during the
football season. Then when the cheer-leaders and the team were heading
the procession, the mob would make for the football field, with the cry
of "Wood, freshmen, wood!" ringing down the line.

Hugh was always one of the first freshmen to break from the line in his
eagerness to get wood. In an incredibly short time he and his classmates
had found a large quantity of old lumber, empty boxes, rotten planks,
and not very rotten gates. When a light was applied to the clumsy pile
of wood, the flames leaped up quickly--some one always seemed to have a
supply of kerosene ready--and revealed the excited upper-classmen
sitting on the bleachers.

"Dance, freshmen, dance!"

Then the freshmen danced around the fire, holding hands and spreading
into an ever widening circle as the fire crackled and the flames leaped
upward. Slowly, almost impressively, the upper-classmen chanted:


                "Round the fire, the freshmen go,
                 Freshmen go,
                 Freshmen go;
                 Round the fire the freshmen go
                 To cheer Sanford."


The song had a dozen stanzas, only the last line of each being
different. The freshmen danced until the last verse was sung, which
ended with the Sanford cheer:


                "Closer now the freshmen go,
                 Freshmen go,
                 Freshmen go;
                 Closer now the freshmen go
                 To cheer--

                 SANFORD!
                 Sanford! Rah, rah!
                 Sanford! Sanford!
                 San--San--San--
                 San--ford, San--ford--San--FORD!"


While the upper-classmen were singing the last stanza the freshmen
slowly closed in on the dying fire. At the first word of the cheer, they
stopped, turned toward the grand stand, and joined the cheering. That
over, they broke and ran for the bleachers, scrambling up the wooden
stands, shoving each other out of the way, laughing and shouting.

The football captain usually made a short and very awkward speech, which
was madly applauded; perhaps the coach said a few words; two or three
cheers were given; and finally every one rose, took off his hat if he
wore one--nearly every one but the freshmen went bareheaded--and sang
the college hymn, simply and religiously. Then the crowd broke,
straggling in groups across the campus, chatting, singing, shouting to
each other. Suddenly lights began to flash in the dormitory windows. In
less than an hour after the first cry of "Peerade!" the men were back
in their rooms, once more studying, talking, or playing cards.

It was the smoker rallies, though, that Hugh found the most thrilling,
especially the last one before the final game of the season, the "big
game" with Raleigh College. There were 1123 students in Sanford, and
more than 1000 were at the rally. A rough platform had been built at one
end of the gymnasium. On one side of it sat the band, on the other side
the Glee Club--and before it the mass of students, smoking cigarettes,
corn-cob pipes, and, occasionally, a cigar. The "smokes" had been
furnished free by a local tobacconist; so everybody smoked violently and
too much. In half an hour it was almost impossible to see the ceiling
through the dull blue haze, and the men in the rear of the gymnasium saw
the speakers on the platform dimly through a wavering mist.

The band played various Sanford songs, and everybody sang. Occasionally
Wayne Gifford, the cheer-leader, leaped upon the platform, raised a
megaphone to his mouth, and shouted, "A regular cheer for Sanford--a
regular cheer for Sanford." Then he lifted his arms above his head,
flinging the megaphone aside with the same motion, and waited tense and
rigid until the students were on their feet. Suddenly he turned into a
mad dervish, twisting, bending, gesticulating, leaping, running back and
forth across the platform, shouting, and finally throwing his hands
above his head and springing high into the air at the concluding
"San--FORD!"

The Glee Club sang to mad applause; a tenor twanged a ukulele and moaned
various blues; a popular professor told stories, some of them funny,
most of them slightly off color; a former cheer-leader told of the
triumphs of former Sanford teams--and the atmosphere grew denser and
denser, bluer and bluer, as the smoke wreathed upward. The thousand boys
leaned intently forward, occasionally jumping to their feet to shout and
cheer, and then sinking back into their chairs, tense and excited. As
each speaker mounted the platform they shouted: "Off with your coat! Off
with your coat!" And the speakers, even the professor, had to shed their
coats before they were permitted to say a word.

When the team entered, bedlam broke loose. Every student stood on his
chair, waved his arms, slapped his neighbor on the back or hugged him
wildly, threw his hat in the air, if he had one--and, so great was his
training, keeping an eye on the cheer-leader, who was on the platform
going through a series of indescribable contortions. Suddenly he
straightened up, held his hands above his head again, and shouted
through his megaphone: "A regular cheer for the team--a regular cheer
for the team. Make it big--BIG! Ready--!" Away whirled the megaphone,
and he went through exactly the same performance that he had used before
in conducting the regular cheer. Gifford looked like an inspired madman,
but he knew exactly what he was doing. The students cheered lustily, so
lustily that some of them were hoarse the next day. They continued to
yell after the cheer was completed, ceasing only when Gifford signaled
for silence.

Then there were speeches by each member of the team, all
enthusiastically applauded, and finally the speech of the evening, that
of the coach, Jack Price. He was a big, compactly built man with regular
features, heavy blond hair, and pale, cold blue eyes. He threw off his
coat with a belligerent gesture, stuck his hands into his trousers
pockets, and waited rigidly until the cheering had subsided. Then he
began:

"Go ahead and yell. It's easy as hell to cheer here in the gym; but what
are you going to do Saturday afternoon?"

His voice was sharp with sarcasm, and to the shouts of "Yell! Fight!"
that came from all over the gymnasium, he answered, "Yeah,
maybe--maybe." He shifted his position, stepping toward the front of the
platform, thrusting his hands deeper into his pockets.

"I've seen a lot of football games, and I've seen lots of rooters, but
this is the goddamndest gang of yellow-bellied quitters that I've ever
seen. What happened last Saturday when we were behind? I'm asking you;
what happened? You quit! Quit like a bunch of whipped curs. God! you're
yellow, yellow as hell. But the team went on fighting--and it won, won
in spite of you, won for a bunch of yellow pups. And why? Because the
team's got guts. And when it was all over, you cheered and howled and
serpentined and felt big as hell. Lord Almighty! you acted as if you'd
done something."

His right hand came out of his pocket with a jerk, and he extended a
fighting, clenched fist toward his breathless audience. "I'll tell you
something," he said slowly, viciously; "the team can't win alone day
after to-morrow. _It can't win alone!_ You've got to fight. Damn it!
_You've got to fight!_ Raleigh's good, damn good; it hasn't lost a game
this season--and we've got to win, _win_! Do you hear? We've got to win!
And there's only one way that we can win, and that's with every man back
of the team. Every goddamned mother's son of you. The team's good, but
it can't win unless you fight--_fight_!"

Suddenly his voice grew softer, almost gentle. He held out both hands to
the boys, who had become so tense that they had forgotten to smoke.
"We've got to win, fellows, for old Sanford. Are you back of us?"

"Yes!" The tension shattered into a thousand yells. The boys leaped on
the chairs and shouted until they could shout no more. When Gifford
called for "a regular cheer for Jack Price" and then one for the
team--"Make it the biggest you ever gave"--they could respond with only
a hoarse croak.

Finally the hymn was sung--at least, the boys tried loyally to sing
it--and they stood silent and almost reverent as the team filed out of
the gymnasium.

Hugh walked back to Surrey Hall with several men. No one said a word
except a quiet good night as they parted. Carl was in the room when he
arrived. He sank into a chair and was silent for a few minutes.

Finally he said in a happy whisper, "Wasn't it wonderful, Carl?"

"Un-huh. Damn good."

"Gosh, I hope we win. We've _got_ to!"

Carl looked up, his cheeks redder than usual, his eyes glittering. "God,
yes!" he breathed piously.




CHAPTER X


The football season lasted from the first of October to the latter part
of November, and during those weeks little was talked about, or even
thought about, on the campus but football. There were undergraduates who
knew the personnel of virtually every football team in the country, the
teams that had played against each other, their relative merits, the
various scores, the outstanding players of each position. Half the
students at Sanford regularly made out "All American" teams, and each
man was more than willing to debate the quality of his team against that
of any other. Night after night the students gathered in groups in
dormitory rooms and fraternity houses, discussing football, football,
football; even religion and sex, the favorite topics for "bull
sessions," could not compete with football, especially when some one
mentioned Raleigh College. Raleigh was Sanford's ancient rival; to
defeat her was of cosmic importance.

There was a game every Saturday. About half the time the team played at
home; the other games were played on the rivals' fields. No matter how
far away the team traveled, the college traveled with it. The men who
had the necessary money went by train; a few owned automobiles: but most
of the undergraduates had neither an automobile nor money for train
fare. They "bummed" their way. Some of them emulated professional
tramps, and "rode the beams," but most of them started out walking,
trusting that kind-hearted motorists would pick them up and carry them
at least part way to their destination. Although the distances were
sometimes great, and although many motorists are not kind, there is no
record of any man who ever started for a game not arriving in time for
the referee's first whistle. Somehow, by hook or by crook--and it was
often by crook--the boys got there, and, what is more astonishing, they
got back. On Monday morning at 8:45 they were in chapel, usually worn
and tired, it is true, ready to bluff their way through the day's
assignments, and damning any instructor who was heartless enough to give
them a quiz. Some of them were worn out from really harsh traveling
experiences; some of them had more exciting adventures to relate behind
closed doors to selected groups of confidants.

Football! Nothing else mattered. And as the weeks passed, the excitement
grew, especially as the day drew near for the Raleigh game, which this
year was to be played on the Sanford field. What were Sanford's chances?
Would Harry Slade, Sanford's great half-back, make All American? "Damn
it to hell, he ought to. It'll be a stinkin' shame if he don't." Would
Raleigh's line be able to stop Slade's end runs? Slade! Slade! He was
the team, the hope and adoration of the whole college.

Three days before the "big game" the alumni began to pour into town,
most of them fairly recent graduates, but many of them gray-haired men
who boasted that they hadn't missed a Sanford-Raleigh game in thirty
years. Hundreds of alumni arrived, filling the two hotels to capacity
and overrunning the fraternity houses, the students doubling up or
seeking hospitality from a friend in a dormitory.

In the little room in the rear of the Sanford Pool and Billiard Parlors
there was almost continual excitement. Jim McCarty, the proprietor, a
big, jovial, red-faced man whom all the students called Mac, was the
official stake-holder for the college. Bets for any amount could be
placed with him. Money from Raleigh flowed into his pudgy hands, and he
placed it at the odds offered with eager Sanford takers. By the day of
the game his safe held thousands of dollars, most of it wagered at five
to three, Raleigh offering odds. There was hardly an alumnus who did not
prove his loyalty to Sanford by visiting Mac's back room and putting
down a few greenbacks, at least. Some were more loyal than others; the
most loyal placed a thousand dollars--at five to two.

There was rain for two days before the game, but on Friday night the
clouds broke. A full moon seemed to shine them away, and the whole
campus rejoiced with great enthusiasm. Most of the alumni got drunk to
show their deep appreciation to the moon, and many of the undergraduates
followed the example set by their elders.

All Friday afternoon girls had been arriving, dozens of them, to attend
the fraternity dances. One dormitory had been set aside for them, the
normal residents seeking shelter in other dormitories. No man ever
objected to resigning his room to a girl. He never could tell what he
would find when he returned to it Monday morning. Some of the girls left
strange mementos....

No one except a few notorious grinds studied that night. Some of the
students were, of course, at the fraternity dances; some of them sat in
dormitory rooms and discussed the coming game from every possible angle;
and groups of them wandered around the campus, peering into the
fraternity houses, commenting on the girls, wandering on humming a song
that an orchestra had been playing, occasionally pausing to give a
"regular cheer" for the moon.

Hugh was too much excited to stay in a room; so with several other
freshmen he traveled the campus. He passionately envied the dancers in
the fraternity houses but consoled himself with the thought, "Maybe
I'll be dancing at the Nu Delt house next year." Then he had a spasm of
fright. Perhaps the Nu Delts--perhaps no fraternity would bid him. The
moon lost its brilliance; for a moment even the Sanford-Raleigh game was
forgotten.

The boys were standing before a fraternity house, and as the music
ceased, Jack Collings suggested: "Let's serenade them. You lead, Hugh."

Hugh had a sweet, light tenor voice. It was not at all remarkable, just
clear and true; but he had easily made the Glee Club and had an
excellent chance to be chosen freshman song-leader.

Collings had brought a guitar with him. He handed it to Hugh, who, like
most musical undergraduates, could play both a guitar and a banjo. "Sing
that 'I arise from dreams of thee' thing that you were singing the other
night. We'll hum."

Hugh slipped the cord around his neck, tuned the guitar, and then
thrummed a few opening chords. His heart was beating at double time; he
was very happy: he was serenading girls at a fraternity dance. Couples
were strolling out upon the veranda, the girls throwing warm wraps over
their shoulders, the men lighting cigarettes and tossing the burnt
matches on the lawn. Their white shirt-fronts gleamed eerily in the pale
light cast by the Japanese lanterns with which the veranda was hung.

Hugh began to sing Shelley's passionate lyric, set so well to music by
Tod B. Galloway. His mother had taught him the song, and he loved it.


                "I arise from dreams of thee
                 In the first sweet sleep of night,
                 When the winds are breathing low
                 And the stars are shining bright.
                 I arise from dreams of thee,
                 And a spirit in my feet
                 Hath led me--who knows how?
                 To thy chamber-window, Sweet!"


Two of the boys, who had heard Hugh sing the song before, hummed a soft
accompaniment. When he began the second verse several more began to hum;
they had caught the melody. The couples on the veranda moved quietly to
the porch railing, their chatter silent, their attention focused on a
group of dim figures standing in the shadow of an elm. Hugh was singing
well, better than he ever had before. Neither he nor his audience knew
that the lyric was immortal, but its tender, passionate beauty caught
and held them.


                "The wandering airs they faint
                 On the dark, the silent stream--
                 The champak odors fail
                 Like sweet-thoughts in a dream;
                 The nightingale's complaint
                 It dies upon her heart,
                 As I must die on thine
                 O beloved as thou art!

                "Oh lift me from the grass!
                 I die, I faint, I fail!
                 Let thy love in kisses rain
                 On my cheeks and eyelids pale.
                 My cheek is cold and white, alas!
                 My heart beats loud and fast;
                 Oh! press it close to thine again
                 Where it will break at last."


There was silence for a moment after Hugh finished. The shadows, the
moonlight, the boy's soft young voice had moved them all. Suddenly a
girl on the veranda cried, "Bring him up!" Instantly half a dozen others
turned to their escorts, insisting shrilly: "Bring him up. We want to
see him."

Hugh jerked the guitar cord from around his neck, banded the instrument
to Collings, and tried to run. A burst of laughter went up from the
freshmen. They caught him and held him fast until the Tuxedo-clad
upper-classmen rushed down from the veranda and had him by the arms.
They pulled him, protesting and struggling, upon the veranda and into
the living-room.

The girls gathered around him, praising, demanding more. He flushed
scarlet when one enthusiastic maiden forced her way through the ring,
looked hard at him, and then announced positively, "I think he's sweet."
He was intensely embarrassed, in an agony of confusion--but very happy.
The girls liked his clean blondness, his blushes, his startled smile.
How long they would have held him there in the center of the ring while
they admired and teased him, there is no telling; but suddenly the
orchestra brought relief by striking up a fox-trot.

"He's mine!" cried a pretty black-eyed girl with a cloud of bobbed hair
and flaming cheeks. Her slender shoulders were bare; her round white
arms waved in excited, graceful gestures; her corn-colored frock was a
gauzy mist. She clutched Hugh's arm. "He's mine," she repeated shrilly.
"He's going to dance with me."

Hugh's cheeks burned a deeper scarlet. "My clothes," he muttered,
hesitating.

"Your clothes! My dear, you look sweet. Take off your cap and dance with
me."

Hugh snatched off his cap, his mind reeling with shame, but he had no
time to think. The girl pulled him through the crowd to a clear floor.
Almost mechanically, Hugh put his arm around her and began to dance. He
_could_ dance, and the girl had sense enough not to talk. She floated in
his arm, her slender body close to his. When the music ceased, she
clapped her little hands excitedly and told Hugh that he danced
"won-der-ful-ly." After the third encore she led him to a dark corner in
the hall.

"You're sweet, honey," she said softly. She turned her small, glowing
face up to his. "Kiss me," she commanded.

Dazed, Hugh gathered her into his arms and kissed her little red mouth.
She clung to him for a minute and then pushed him gently away.

"Good night, honey," she whispered.

"Good night." Hugh's voice broke huskily. He turned and walked rapidly
down the hall, upon the veranda, and down the steps. His classmates were
waiting for him. They rushed up to him, demanding that he tell them what
had happened.

He told them most of it, especially about the dance; but he neglected to
mention the kiss. Shyness overcame any desire that he had to strut.
Besides, there was something about that kiss that made it impossible for
him to tell any one, even Carl. When he went to bed that night, he did
not think once about the coming football game. Before his eyes floated
the girl in the corn-colored frock. He wished he knew her name....
Closer and closer she came to him. He could feel her cool arms around
his neck. "What a wonderful, wonderful girl! Sweeter than Helen--lots
sweeter.... She's like the night--and moonlight.... Like moonlight
and--" The music of the "Indian Serenade" began to thrill through his
mind:


                "I arise from dreams of thee
                 In the first sweet sleep of night....


Oh, she's sweet, sweet--like music and moonlight...." He fell asleep,
repeating "music and moonlight" over and over again--"music and
moonlight...."

       *       *       *       *       *

The morning of the "big game" proved ideal, crisp and cold, crystal
clear. Indian summer was near its close, but there was still something
of its dreamy wonder in the air, and the hills still flamed with
glorious autumn foliage. The purples, the mauves, the scarlets, the
burnt oranges were a little dimmed, a little less brilliant--the leaves
were rustling dryly now--but there was beauty in dying autumn, its
splendor slowly fading, as there was in its first startling burst of
color.

Classes that Saturday morning were a farce, but they were held; the
administration, which the boys damned heartily, insisted upon it. Some
of the instructors merely took the roll and dismissed their classes,
feeling that honor had been satisfied; but others held their classes
through the hour, lecturing the disgusted students on their lack of
interest, warning them that examinations weren't as far off as the
millennium.

Hugh felt that he was lucky; he had only one class--it was with Alling
in Latin--and it had been promptly dismissed. "When the day comes," said
Alling, "that Latin can compete with football, I'll--well, I'll probably
get a living wage. You had better go before I get to talking about a
living wage. It is one of my favorite topics." He waved his hand toward
the door; the boys roared with delight and rushed out of the room,
shoving each other and laughing. They ran out of the building; all of
them were too excited to walk.

By half-past one the stands were filled. Most of the girls wore fur
coats, as did many of the alumni, but the students sported no such
luxuries; nine tenths of them wore "baa-baa coats," gray jackets lined
with sheep's wool. Except for an occasional banner, usually carried by a
girl, and the bright hats of the women, there was little color to the
scene. The air was sharp, and the spectators huddled down into their
warm coats.

The rival cheering sections, seated on opposite sides of the field,
alternated in cheering and singing, each applauding the other's efforts.
The cheering wasn't very good, and the singing was worse; but there was
a great deal of noise, and that was about all that mattered to either
side.

A few minutes before two, the Raleigh team ran upon the field. The
Raleigh cheering section promptly went mad. When the Sanford team
appeared a minute later, the Sanford cheering section tried its best to
go madder, the boys whistling and yelling like possessed demons. Wayne
Gifford brought them to attention by holding his hands above his head.
He called for the usual regular cheer for the team and then for a short
cheer for each member of it, starting with the captain, Sherman
Walford, and ending with the great half-back, Harry Slade.

Suddenly there was silence. The toss-up had been completed; the teams
were in position on the field. Slade had finished building a slender
pyramid of mud, on which he had balanced the ball. The referee held up
his hand. "Are you ready, Sanford?" Walford signaled his readiness. "Are
you ready, Raleigh?"

The shrill blast of the referee's whistle--and the game was on. The
first half was a see-saw up and down the field. Near the end of the half
Raleigh was within twenty yards of the Sanford line. Shouts of "Score!
Score! Score!" went up from the Raleigh rooters, rhythmic, insistent.
"Hold 'em! Hold 'em! Fight! Fight! Fight!" the Sanford cheering section
pleaded, almost sobbing the words. A forward pass skilfully completed
netted Raleigh sixteen yards. "Fight! Fight! Fight!"

The timekeeper tooted his little horn; the half was over. For a moment
the Sanford boys leaned back exhausted; then they leaped to their feet
and yelled madly, while the Raleigh boys leaned back or against each
other and swore fervently. Within two minutes the tension had departed.
The rival cheering sections alternated in singing songs, applauded each
other vigorously, whistled at a frightened dog that tried to cross the
field and nearly lost its mind entirely when called by a thousand
masters, waited breathlessly when the cheer-leaders announced the
results from other football games that had been telegraphed to the
field, applauded if Harvard was losing, groaned if it wasn't, sang some
more, relaxed and felt consummately happy.

Sanford immediately took the offensive in the second half. Slade was
consistently carrying the ball. Twice he brought it within Raleigh's
twenty-five-yard line. The first time Raleigh held firm, but the second
time Slade stepped back for a drop-kick. The spectators sat silent,
breathless. The angle was difficult. Could he make it? Would the line
hold?

Quite calmly Slade waited. The center passed the ball neatly. Slade
turned it in his hands, paid not the slightest attention to the mad
struggle going on a few feet in front of him, dropped the ball--and
kicked. The ball rose in a graceful arc and passed safely between the
goal-posts.

Every one, men and women alike, the Raleigh adherents excepted, promptly
turned into extraordinarily active lunatics. The women waved their
banners and shrieked, or if they had no banners, they waved their arms
and shrieked; the men danced up and down, yelled, pounded each other on
the back, sometimes wildly embraced--many a woman was kissed by a man
she had never seen before and never would again, nor did she
object--Wayne Gifford was turning handsprings, and many of the students
were feebly fluttering their hands, voiceless, spent with cheering, weak
from excitement.

Early in the fourth quarter, however, Raleigh got its revenge, carrying
the ball to a touch-down after a series of line rushes. Sanford tried
desperately to score again, but its best efforts were useless against
the Raleigh defense.

The final whistle blew; and Sanford had lost. Cheering wildly, tossing
their hats into the air, the Raleigh students piled down from the grand
stand upon the field. With the cheer-leaders at the head, waving their
megaphones, the boys rapidly formed into a long line in uneven groups,
holding arms, dancing, shouting, winding in and out around the field,
between the goal-posts, tossing their hats over the bars, waving their
hands at the Sanford men standing despondently in their places--in and
out, in and out, in the triumphant serpentine. Finally they paused, took
off their hats, cheered first their own team, then the Sanford team, and
then sang their hymn while the Sanford men respectfully uncovered,
silent and despairing.

When the hymn was over, the Sanford men quietly left the grand stand,
quietly formed into a long line in groups of fours, quietly marched to
the college flagpole in the center of the campus. A Sanford banner was
flying from the pole, a blue banner with an orange S. Wayne Gifford
loosened the ropes. Down fluttered the banner, and the boys reverently
took off their hats. Gifford caught the banner before it touched the
ground and gathered it into his arms. The song-leader stepped beside
him. He lifted his hand, sang a note, and then the boys sang with him,
huskily, sadly, some of them with tears streaming down their cheeks:


                "Sanford, Sanford, mother of men,
                 Love us, guard us, hold us true.
                 Let thy arms enfold us;
                 Let thy truth uphold us.
                 Queen of colleges, mother of men--
                 Alma mater, Sanford--hail!
                 Alma mater--Hail!--Hail!"


Slowly the circle broke into small groups that straggled wearily across
the campus. Hugh, with two or three others, was walking behind two young
professors--one of them, Alling, the other, Jones of the economics
department. Hugh was almost literally broken-hearted; the defeat lay on
him like an awful sorrow that never could be lifted. Every inch of him
ached, but his despair was greater than his physical pain. The sharp,
clear voice of Jones broke into his half-deadened consciousness.

"I can't understand all this emotional excitement," said Jones crisply.
"A football game is a football game, not a national calamity. I enjoy
the game myself, but why weep over it? I don't think I ever saw anything
more absurd than those boys singing with tears running into their
mouths."

Shocked, the boys looked at each other. They started to make angry
remarks but paused as Alling spoke.

"Of course, what you say, Jones, is quite right," he remarked calmly,
"quite right. But, do you know, I pity you."

"Alling's a good guy," Hugh told Carl later; "he's human."




CHAPTER XI


After the Sanford-Raleigh game, the college seemed to be slowly dying.
The boys held countless post-mortems over the game, explaining to each
other just how it had been lost or how it could have been won. They
watched the newspapers eagerly as the sport writers announced their
choice for the so-called All American team. If Slade was on the team,
the writer was conceded to "know his dope"; if Slade wasn't, the writer
was a "dumbbell." But all this pseudo-excitement was merely picking at
the covers; there was no real heart in it. Gradually the football talk
died down; freshmen ceased to write themes about Sanford's great
fighting spirit; sex and religion once more became predominant at the
"bull sessions."

Studies, too, began to find a place in the sun. Hour examinations were
coming, and most of the boys knew that they were miserably prepared.
Lights were burning in fraternity houses and dormitories until late at
night, and mighty little of their glow was shed on poker parties and
crap games. The college had begun to study.

When Hugh finally calmed down and took stock, he was horrified and
frightened to discover how far he was behind in all his work. He had
done his lessons sketchily from day to day, but he really knew nothing
about them, and he knew that he didn't. Since Morse's departure, he had
loafed, trusting to luck and the knowledge he had gained in high school.
So far he had escaped a summons from the dean, but he daily expected
one, and the mere thought of hour examinations made him shiver. He
studied hard for a week, succeeding only in getting gloriously confused
and more frightened. The examinations proved to be easier than he had
expected; he didn't fail in any of them, but he did not get a grade
above a C.

The examination flurry passed, and the college was left cold. Nothing
seemed to happen. The boys went to the movies every night, had a peanut
fight, talked to the shadowy actors; they played cards, pool, and
billiards, or shot craps; Saturday nights many of them went to a dance
at Hastings, a small town five miles away; they held bull sessions and
discussed everything under the sun and some things beyond it; they
attended a performance of Shaw's "Candida" given by the Dramatic Society
and voted it a "wet" show; and, incidentally, some of them studied. But,
all in all, life was rather tepid, and most of the boys were merely
marking time and waiting for Christmas vacation.

For Hugh the vacation came and went with a rush. It was glorious to get
home again, glorious to see his father and mother, and, at first,
glorious to see Helen Simpson. But Helen had begun to pall; her kisses
hardly compensated for her conversation. She gave him a little feeling
of guilt, too, which he tried to argue away. "Kissing isn't really
wrong. Everybody pets; at least, Carl says they do. Helen likes it
but..." Always that "but" intruded itself. "But it doesn't seem quite
right when--I don't really love her." When he kissed her for the last
time before returning to college, he had a distinct feeling of relief:
well, that would be off his mind for a while, anyway.

It was a sober, quiet crowd of students--for the first time they were
students--that returned to their desks after the vacation. The final
examinations were ahead of them, less than a month away; and those
examinations hung over their heads like the relentless, glittering blade
of a guillotine. The boys studied. "College life" ceased; there was a
brief period of education.

Of course, they did not desert the movies, and the snow and ice claimed
them. Part of Indian Lake was scraped free of snow, and every clear
afternoon hundreds of boys skated happily, explaining afterward that
they had to have some exercise if they were going to be able to study.
On those afternoons the lake was a pretty sight, zestful, alive with
color. Many of the men wore blue sweaters, some of them brightly colored
Mackinaws, all of them knitted toques. As soon as the cold weather
arrived, the freshmen had been permitted to substitute blue toques with
orange tassels for their "baby bonnets." The blue and orange stood out
vividly against the white snow-covered hills, and the skates rang
sharply as they cut the glare ice.

There was snow-shoeing, skiing, and sliding "to keep a fellow fit so
that he could do good work in his exams," but much as the boys enjoyed
the winter sports, a black pall hung over the college as the examination
period drew nearer and nearer. The library, which had been virtually
deserted all term, suddenly became crowded. Every afternoon and evening
its big tables were filled with serious-faced lads earnestly bending
over books, making notes, running their fingers through their hair,
occasionally looking up with dazed eyes, or twisting about miserably.

The tension grew greater and greater. The upper-classmen were quiet and
businesslike, but most of the freshmen were frankly terrified. A few of
them packed their trunks and slunk away, and a few more openly scorned
the examinations and their frightened classmates; but they were the
exceptions. All the buoyancy seemed gone out of the college; nothing was
left but an intense strain. The dormitories were strangely quiet at
night. There was no playing of golf in the hallways, no rolling of bats
down the stairs, no shouting, no laughter; a man who made any noise was
in danger of a serious beating. Even the greetings as the men passed
each other on the campus were quiet and abstracted. They ceased to cut
classes. Everybody attended, and everybody paid close attention even to
the most tiresome instructors.

Studious seniors began to reap a harvest out of tutoring sections. The
meetings were a dollar "a throw," and for another dollar a student could
get a mimeographed outline of a course. But the tutoring sections were
only for the "plutes" or the athletes, many of whom were subsidized by
fraternities or alumni. Most of the students had to learn their own
lessons; so they often banded together in small groups to make the task
less arduous, finding some relief in sociability.

The study groups, quite properly called seminars, would have shocked
many a worthy professor had he been able to attend one; but they were
truly educative, and to many students inspiring. The professor had
planted the seed of wisdom with them; it was at the seminars that they
tried honestly, if somewhat hysterically and irreverently, to make it
grow.

Hugh did most of his studying alone, fearing that the seminars would
degenerate into bull sessions, as many of them did; but Carl insisted
that he join one group that was going "to wipe up that goddamned
English course to-night."

There were only five men at the seminar, which met in Surrey 19, because
Pudge Jamieson, who was "rating" an A in the course and was therefore an
authority, said that he wouldn't come if there were any more. Pudge, as
his nickname suggests, was plump. He was a round-faced, jovial youngster
who learned everything with consummate ease, wrote with great fluency
and sometimes real beauty, peered through his horn-rimmed spectacles
amusedly at the world, and read every "smut" book that he could lay his
hands on. His library of erotica was already famous throughout the
college, his volumes of Balzac's "Droll Stories," Rabelais complete,
"Mlle. de Maupin," Burton's "Arabian Nights," and the "Decameron" being
in constant demand. He could tell literally hundreds of dirty stories,
always having a new one on tap, always looking when he told it like a
complacent cherub.

There were two other men in the seminar. Freddy Dickson, an earnest,
anemic youth, seemed to be always striving for greater acceleration and
never gaining it; or as Pudge put it, "The trouble with Freddy is that
he's always shifting gears." Larry Stillwell, the last man, was a dark,
handsome youth with exceedingly regular features, pomaded hair parted in
the center and shining sleekly, fine teeth, and rich coloring: a
"smooth" boy who prided himself on his conquests and the fact that he
never got a grade above a C in his courses. There was no man in the
freshman class with a finer mind, but he declined to study, declaring
firmly that he could not waste his time acquiring impractical tastes for
useless arts.

"Now everybody shut up," said Pudge, seating himself in a big chair and
laboriously crossing one leg over the other. "Put some more wood on the
fire, Hugh, will you?"

Hugh stirred up the fire, piled on a log or so, and then returned to his
chair, hoping against belief that something really would be accomplished
in the seminar. All the boys, he excepted, were smoking, and all of them
were lolling back in dangerously comfortable attitudes.

"We've got to get going," Pudge continued, "and we aren't going to get
anything done if we just sit around and bull. I'm the prof, and I'm
going to ask questions. Now, don't bull. If you don't know, just say,
'No soap,' and if you do know, shoot your dope." He grinned. "How's that
for a rime?"

"Atta boy!" Carl exclaimed enthusiastically.

"Shut up! Now, the stuff we want to get at to-night is the poetry. No use
spending any time on the composition. My prof said that we would have
to write themes in the exam, but we can't do anything about that here.
You're all getting by on your themes, anyway, aren't you?"

"Yeah," the listening quartet answered in unison, Larry Stillwell adding
dubiously, "Well, I'm getting C's."

"Larry," said Carl in cold contempt, "you're a goddamn liar. I saw a B
on one of your themes the other day and an A on another. What are you
always pulling that low-brow stuff for?"

Larry had the grace to blush. "Aw," he explained in some confusion, "my
prof's full of hooey. He doesn't know a C theme from an A one. He makes
me sick. He--"

"Aw, shut up!" Freddy Dickson shouted. "Let's get going; let's get
going. We gotta learn this poetry. Damn! I don't know anything about it.
I didn't crack the book till two days ago."

Pudge took charge again. "Close your gabs, everybody," he commanded
sternly. "There's no sense in going over the prose lit. You can do that
better by yourselves. God knows I'm not going to waste my time telling
you bone-heads what Carlyle means by a hero. If you don't know Odin from
Mohammed by this time, you can roast in Dante's hell for all of me. Now
listen; the prof said that they were going to make us place lines, and,
of course, they'll expect us to know what the poems are about. Hell!
how some of the boys are going to fox 'em." He paused to laugh. "Jim
Hicks told me this afternoon that 'Philomela' was by Shakspere." The
other boys did not understand the joke, but they all laughed heartily.

"Now," he went on, "I'll give you the name of a poem, and then you tell
me what it's about and who wrote it."

He leafed rapidly through an anthology. "Carl, who wrote 'Kubla Khan'?"

Carl puffed his pipe meditatively. "I'm going to fox you, Pudge," he
said, frankly triumphant; "I know. Coleridge wrote it. It seems to be
about a Jew who built a swell joint for a wild woman or something like
that. I can't make much out of the damn thing."

"That's enough. Smack for Carl," said Pudge approvingly. "Smack" meant
that the answer was satisfactory. "Freddy, who wrote 'La Belle Dame sans
Merci'?"

Freddy twisted in his chair, thumped his head with his knuckles, and
finally announced with a groan of despair, "No soap."

"Hugh?"

"No soap."

"Larry?"

"Well," drawled Larry, "I think Jawn Keats wrote it. It's one of those
bedtime stories with a kick. A knight gets picked up by a jane. He puts
her on his prancing steed and beats it for the tall timber. Keats isn't
very plain about what happened there, but I suspect the worst. Anyhow,
the knight woke up the next morning with an awful rotten taste in his
mouth."

"Smack for Larry. Your turn, Carl. Who wrote 'The West Wind'?"

"You can't get me on that boy Masefield, Pudge. I know all his stuff.
There isn't any story; it's just about the west wind, but it's a goddamn
good poem. It's the cat's pajamas."

"You said it, Carl," Hugh chimed in, "but I like 'Sea Fever' better.


                "I must go down to the seas again,
                 To the lonely sea and the sky....


Gosh! that's hot stuff. 'August, 1914''s a peach, too."

"Yeah," agreed Larry languidly; "I got a great kick when the prof read
that in class. Masefield's all right. I wish we had more of his stuff
and less of Milton. Lord Almighty, how I hate Milton! What th' hell do
they have to give us that tripe for?"

"Oh, let's get going," Freddy pleaded, running a nervous hand through
his mouse-colored hair. "Shoot a question, Pudge."

"All right, Freddy." Pudge tried to smile wickedly but succeeded only in
looking like a beaming cherub. "Tell us who wrote the 'Ode on
Intimations of Immortality from Recollections of Early Childhood.'
Cripes! what a title!"

Freddy groaned. "I know that Wadsworth wrote it, but that is all that I
do know about it."

"Wordsworth, Freddy," Carl corrected him. "Wordsworth. Henry W.
Wordsworth."

"Gee, Carl, thanks. I thought it was William."

There was a burst of laughter, and then Pudge explained. "It is William,
Freddy. Don't let Peters razz you. Just for that, Carl, you tell what
it's about."

"No soap," said Carl decisively.

"I know," Hugh announced, excited and pleased.

"Shoot!"

"Well, it's this reincarnation business. Wordsworth thought you lived
before you came on to this earth, and everything was fine when you were
a baby but it got worse when you got older. That's about all. It's kinda
bugs, but I like some of it."

"It isn't bugs," Pudge contradicted flatly; "it's got sense. You do lose
something as you grow older, but you gain something, too. Wordsworth
admits that. It's a wonderful poem, and you're dumbbells if you can't
see it." He was very serious as he turned the pages of the book and laid
his pipe on the table at his elbow. "Now listen. This stanza has the
dope for the whole poem." He read the famous stanza simply and
effectively:


                "Our birth is but a sleep and a forgetting;
                 The soul that rises with us, our life's Star,
                   Hath had elsewhere its setting
                     And cometh from afar;
                     Not in entire forgetfulness,
                     And not in utter nakedness,
                 But trailing clouds of glory do we come
                         From God who is our home:
                 Heaven lies about us in our infancy!
                 Shades of the prison house begin to close
                         Upon the growing Boy,
                 But he beholds the light, and whence it flows,
                         He sees it in his joy;
                 The Youth who daily farther from the east
                   Must travel, still is Nature's priest,
                      And by the vision splendid
                      Is on his way attended;
                 At length the Man perceives it die away,
                 And fade into the light of common day."


There was a moment's silence when he finished, and then Hugh said
reverently: "That is beautiful. Read the last stanza, will you, Pudge?"

So Pudge read the last stanza, and then the boys got into an argument
over the possible truth of the thesis of the poem. Freddy finally
brought them back to the task in hand with his plaintive plea, "We've
gotta get going." It was two o'clock in the morning when the seminar
broke up, Hugh admitting to Carl after their visitors departed that he
had not only learned a lot but that he had enjoyed the evening heartily.

The college grew quieter and quieter as the day for the examinations
approached. There were seminars on everything, even on the best way to
prepare cribs. Certain students with low grades and less honor would
somehow gravitate together and discuss plans for "foxing the profs."
Opinions differed. One man usually insisted that notes in the palm of
the left hand were safe from detection, only to be met by the objection
that they had to be written in ink, and if one's hand perspired, "and it
was sure as hell to," nothing was left but an inky smear. Another held
that a fellow could fasten a rubber band on his forearm and attach the
notes to those, pulling them down when needed and then letting them snap
back out of sight into safety. "But," one of the conspirators was sure
to object, "what th' hell are you going to do if the band breaks?" Some
of them insisted that notes placed in the inside of one's goloshes--all
the students wore them but took them off in the examination-room--could
be easily read. "Yeah, but the proctors are wise to that stunt." And so
_ad infinitum_. Eventually all the "stunts" were used and many more. Not
that all the students cheated. Everything considered, the percentage of
cheaters was not great, but those who did cheat usually spent enough
time evolving ingenious methods of preparing cribs and in preparing them
to have learned their lessons honestly and well.

The night before the first examinations the campus was utterly quiet.
Suddenly bedlam broke loose. Somehow every dormitory that contained
freshmen became a madhouse at the same time. Hugh and Carl were in
Surrey 19 earnestly studying. Freddy Dickson flung the door open and
shouted hysterically, "The general science exam's out!"

Hugh and Carl whirled around in their desk-chairs.

"What?" They shouted together.

"Yeah! One of the fellows saw it. A girl that works at the press copied
down the exam and gave it to him."

"What fellow? Where's the exam?"

"I don't know who the guy is, but Hubert Manning saw the exam."

Hugh and Carl were out of their chairs in an instant, and the three boys
rushed out of Surrey in search of Manning. They found him in his room
telling a mob of excited classmates that he hadn't seen the exam but
that Harry Smithson had. Away went the crowd in search of Smithson, Carl
and Hugh and Freddy in the midst of the excited, chattering lads.
Smithson hadn't seen the exam, but he had heard that Puddy McCumber had
a copy.... Freshmen were running up and down stairs in the dormitories,
shouting, "Have you seen the exam?" No, nobody had seen the exam, but
some of the boys had been told definitely what the questions were going
to be. No two seemed to agree on the questions, but everybody copied
them down and then rushed on to search for a _bona fide_ copy. They
hurried from dormitory to dormitory, constantly shouting the same
question, "Have you seen the exam?" There were men in every dormitory
with a new list of questions, which were hastily scratched into
note-books by the eager seekers. Until midnight the excitement raged;
then the campus quieted down as the freshmen began to study the long
lists of questions.

"God!" said Carl as he scanned his list hopelessly, "these damn
questions cover everything in the course and some things that I know
damn well weren't in it. What a lot of nuts we were. Let's go to bed."

"Carl," Hugh wailed despondently, "I'm going to flunk that exam. I can't
answer a tenth of these questions. I can't go to bed; I've got to study.
Oh, Lord!"

"Don't be a triple-plated jackass. Come on to bed. You'll just get woozy
if you stay up any longer."

"All right," Hugh agreed wearily. He went to bed, but many of the boys
stayed up and studied, some of them all night.

The examinations were held in the gymnasium. Hundreds of class-room
chairs were set in even rows. Nothing else was there, not even the
gymnasium apparatus. A few years earlier a wily student had sneaked into
the gymnasium the night before an examination and written his notes on a
dumbbell hanging on the wall. The next day he calmly chose the seat in
front of the dumbbell--and proceeded to write a perfect examination. The
annotated dumbbell was found later, and after that the walls were
stripped clean of apparatus before the examinations began.

At a few minutes before nine the entire freshman class was grouped
before the doors of the gymnasium, nervously talking, some of them
glancing through their notes, others smoking--some of them so rapidly
that the cigarettes seemed to melt, others walking up and down,
muttering and mumbling; all of them so excited, so tense that they
hardly knew what they were doing. Hugh was trying to think of a dozen
answers to questions that popped into his head, and he couldn't think of
anything.

Suddenly the doors were thrown open. Yelling, shoving each other about,
fairly dancing in their eagerness and excitement, the freshmen rushed
into the gymnasium. Hugh broke from the mob as quickly as possible,
hurried to a chair, and snatched up a copy of the examination that was
lying on its broad arm. At the first glance he thought that he could
answer all the questions; a second glance revealed four that meant
nothing to him. For a moment he was dizzy with hope and despair, and
then, all at once, he felt quite calm. He pulled off his goloshes and
prepared to go to work.

Within three minutes the noise had subsided. There was a rustling as the
boys took off their baa-baa coats and goloshes, but after that there was
no sound save the slow steps of the proctors pacing up and down the
aisle. Once Hugh looked up, thinking desperately, almost seizing an idea
that floated nebulous and necessary before him. A proctor that he knew
caught his eye and smiled fatuously. Hugh did not smile back. He could
have cried in his fury. The idea was gone forever.

Some of the students began to write immediately; some of them leaned
back and stared at the ceiling; some of them chewed their pencils
nervously; some of them leaned forward mercilessly pounding a knee; some
of them kept running one or both hands through their hair; some of them
wrote a little and then paused to gaze blankly before them or to tap
their teeth with a pen or pencil: all of them were concentrating with an
intensity that made the silence electric.

That proctor's idiotic smile had thrown Hugh's thoughts into what
seemed hopeless confusion, but a small incident almost immediately
brought order and relief. The gymnasium cat was wandering around the
rear of the gymnasium. It attracted the attention of several of the
students--and of a proctor. Being very careful not to make any noise, he
picked up the cat and started for the door. Almost instantly every
student looked up; and then the stamping began. Four hundred freshmen
stamped in rhythm to the proctor's steps. He Hushed violently, tried
vainly to look unconcerned, and finally disappeared through the door
with the cat. Hugh had stamped lustily and laughed in great glee at the
proctor's confusion; then he returned to his work, completely at ease,
his nervousness gone.

One hour passed, two hours. Still the freshmen wrote; still the proctors
paced up and down. Suddenly a proctor paused, stared intently at a youth
who was leaning forward in his chair, walked quickly to him, and picked
up one of his goloshes. The next instant he had a piece of paper in his
hand and was, walking down the gymnasium after beckoning to the boy to
follow him. The boy shoved his feet into his goloshes, pulled on his
baa-baa coat, and, his face white and strained, marched down the aisle.
The proctor spoke a few words to him at the door. He nodded, opened the
door, left the gymnasium--and five hours later the college.

Thus the college for ten days: the better students moderately calm, the
others cramming information into aching heads, drinking unbelievable
quantities of coffee, sitting up, many of them, all night, attending
seminars or tutoring sessions, working for long hours in the library,
finally taking the examination, only to start a new nerve-racking grind
in preparation for the next one.

If a student failed in a course, he received a "flunk notice" from the
registrar's office within four days after the examination, so that four
days after the last examination every student knew whether he had passed
his courses or not. All those who failed to pass three courses were, as
the students put it, "flunked out," or as the registrar put it, "their
connection with the college was severed." Some of the flunkees took the
news very casually, packed their trunks, sold their furniture, and
departed; others frankly wept or hastened to their instructors to plead
vainly that their grades be raised: all of them were required to leave
Haydensville at once.

Hugh passed all of his courses but without distinction. His B in
trigonometry did not give him great satisfaction inasmuch as he had
received an A in exactly the same course in high school; nor was he
particularly proud of his B in English, since he knew that with a
little effort he could have "pulled" an A. The remainder of his grades
were C's and D's, mostly D's. He felt almost as much ashamed as Freddy
Dickson, who somehow hadn't "got going" and had been flunked out. Carl
received nothing less than a C, and his record made Hugh more ashamed of
his own. Carl never seemed to study, but he hadn't disgraced himself.

Hugh spent many bitter hours thinking about his record. What would his
folks think? Worse, what would they _say?_ Finally he wrote to them:



       Dear Mother and Dad:

       I have just found out my grades. I think that they will
       be sent to you later. Well, I didn't flunk out but my
       record isn't so hot. Only two of my grades are any good.
       I got a B in English and Math but the others are all C's
       and D's. I know that you will be ashamed of me and I'm
       awfully sorry. I've thought of lots of excuses to write
       to you, but I guess I won't write them. I know that I
       didn't study hard enough. I had too much fun.

       I promise you that I'll do better next time. I know that
       I can. Please don't scold me.

                                Lots of love,
                                                HUGH


All that his mother wrote in reply was, "Of course, you will do better
next time." The kindness hurt dreadfully. Hugh wished that she had
scolded him.




CHAPTER XII


The college granted a vacation of three days between terms, but Hugh did
not go home, nor did many of the other undergraduates. There was
excitement in the air; the college was beginning to stew and boil again.
Fraternity rushing was scheduled for the second week of the new term.

The administration strictly prohibited the rushing of freshmen the first
term; and, in general, the fraternities respected the rule. True, the
fraternity men were constantly visiting eligible freshmen, chatting with
them, discussing everything with them except fraternities. That subject
was barred.

Hugh and Carl received a great many calls from upper-classmen the first
term, and Hugh had been astonished at Carl's reticence and silence.
Carl, the flippant, the voluble, the "wise-cracker," lost his tongue the
minute a man wearing a fraternity pin entered the room. Hugh was forced
to entertain the all-important guest. Carl never explained how much he
wanted to make a good fraternity, not any fraternity, only a _good_ one;
nor did he explain that his secret studying the first term had been
inspired by his eagerness to be completely eligible. A good fraternity
would put the seal of aristocracy on him; it would mean everything to
the "old lady."

For the first three nights of the rushing season the fraternities held
open house for all freshmen, but during the last three nights no
freshman was supposed to enter a fraternity house unless Invited.

The first three nights found the freshmen traveling in scared groups
from fraternity house to fraternity house, sticking close together
unless rather vigorously pried apart by their hosts. Everybody was
introduced to everybody else; everybody tried rather hopelessly to make
conversation, and nearly everybody smoked too much, partly because they
were nervous and partly because the "smokes" were free.

It was the last three nights that counted. Both Hugh and Carl received
invitations from most of the fraternities, and they stuck together,
religiously visiting them all. Hugh hoped that they would "make" the
same fraternity and that that fraternity would be Nu Delta. They were
together so consistently during the rushing period that the story went
around the campus that Carver and Peters were "going the same way," and
that Carver had said that he wouldn't accept a bid from any fraternity
unless it asked Peters, too.

Hugh heard the story and couldn't understand it. Everybody seemed to
take it for granted that he would be bid. Why didn't they take it
equally for granted that Carl would be bid as well? He thought perhaps
it was because he was an athlete and Carl wasn't; but the truth was, of
course, that the upper-classmen perceived the _nouveau riche_ quality in
Carl quite as clearly as he did himself. He knew that his money and the
fact that he had gone to a fashionable prep school would bring him bids,
but would they be from the right fraternities? That was the
all-important question.

Those last three days of rushing were nerve-racking. At night the
invited freshmen--and that meant about two thirds of the class--were at
the fraternity houses until eleven; between classes and during every
free hour they were accosted by earnest fraternity men, each presenting
the superior merits of his fraternity. The fraternity men were wearier
than the freshmen. They sat up until the small hours every morning
discussing the freshmen they had entertained the night before.

Hugh was in a daze. Over and over he heard the same words with only
slight variations. A fraternity man would slap a fat book with an
excited hand and exclaim: "This is 'Baird's Manual,' the final authority
on fraternities, and it's got absolutely all the dope. You can see where
we stand. Sixty chapters! You don't join just this one, y' understand;
you join all of 'em. You're welcome wherever you go." Or, if the number
of chapters happened to be small, "Baird's Manual" was referred to
again. "Only fifteen chapters, you see. We don't take in new chapters
every time they ask. We're darned careful to know what we're signing up
before we take anybody in." The word "aristocratic" was carefully
avoided, but it was just as carefully suggested.

It seemed to Hugh that he was shown a photograph of every fraternity
house in the country. "Look," he would be told by his host, "look at
that picture to the right of the fireplace. That's our house at Cornell.
Isn't it the darb? And look at that one. It's our house at California.
Some palace. They've got sunken gardens. I was out there last year to
our convention. The boys certainly gave us a swell time."

All this through a haze of tobacco smoke and over the noise of a jazz
orchestra and the chatter of a dozen similar conversations. Hugh was
excited but not really interested. The Nu Deltas invited him to their
house every evening, but they were not making a great fuss over him.
Perhaps they weren't going to give him a bid.... Well, he'd go some
other fraternity. No, he wouldn't, either. Maybe the Nu Delta's would
bid him later after he'd done something on the track.

Although actual pledging was not supposed to be done until Saturday
night, Hugh was receiving what amounted to bids all that day and the
night before. Several times groups of fraternity men got into a room,
closed the door, and then talked to him until he was almost literally
dizzy. He was wise enough not to make any promises. His invariable
answer was: "I don't know yet. I won't know until Saturday night."

Carl was having similar experiences, but neither of them had been talked
to by Nu Deltas. The president of the chapter, Merle Douglas, had said
to Hugh in passing, "We've got our eye on you, Carver," and that was all
that had been said. Carl did not have even that much consolation. But he
wasn't so much interested in Nu Delta as Hugh was; Kappa Zeta or Alpha
Sigma would do as well. Both of these fraternities were making violent
efforts to get Hugh, but they were paying only polite attention to Carl.

On Friday night Hugh was given some advice that he had good reason to
remember in later years. At the moment it did not interest him a great
deal.

He had gone to the Delta Sigma Delta house, not because he had the
slightest interest in that fraternity but because the Nu Deltas had not
urged him to remain with them. The Delta Sigma Deltas welcomed him
enthusiastically and turned him over to their president, Malcolm Graham,
a tall serious senior with sandy hair and quiet brown eyes.

"Will you come up-stairs with me, Carver? I want to have a talk with
you," he said simply.

Hugh hesitated. He didn't mind being talked _to_, but he was heartily
sick of being talked _at_.

Graham noticed his hesitation and smiled. "Don't worry; I'm not going to
shanghai you, and I'm not going to jaw you to death, either."

Hugh smiled in response. "I'm glad of that," he said wearily. "I've been
jawed until I don't know anything."

"I don't doubt it. Come on; let's get away from this racket." He took
Hugh by the arm and led him up-stairs to his own room, which was
pleasantly quiet and restful after the noise they had left.

When they were both seated in comfortable chairs, Graham began to talk.
"I know that you are being tremendously rushed, Carver, and I know that
you are going to get a lot of bids, too. I've been watching you all
through this week, and you seem dazed and confused to me, more confused
even than the average freshman. I think I know the reason."

"What is it?" Hugh demanded eagerly.

"I understand that your father is a Nu Delt."

Hugh nodded.

"And you're afraid that they aren't going to bid you."

Hugh was startled. "How did you know?" He never thought of denying the
statement.

"I guessed it. You were obviously worried; you visited other
fraternities; and you didn't seem to enjoy the attention that you were
getting. I'll tell you right now that you are worrying about nothing;
the Nu Delts will bid you. They are just taking you for granted; that's
all. You are a legacy, and you have accepted all their invitations to
come around. If you had stayed away one night, there would have been a
whole delegation rushing around the campus to hunt you up."

Hugh relaxed. For the time being he believed Graham implicitly.

"Now," Graham went on, "it's the Nu Delts that I want to talk about. Oh,
I'm not going to knock them," he hastened to add as Hugh eyed him
suspiciously. "I know that you have heard plenty of fraternities
knocking each other, but I am sure that you haven't heard any knocking
in this house."

"No I haven't," Hugh admitted.

"Well, you aren't going to, either. The Nu Delts are much more important
than we are. They are stronger locally, and they've got a very powerful
national organization. But I don't think that you have a very clear
notion about the Nu Delts or us or any other fraternity. I heard you
talking about fraternities the other night, and, if you will forgive me
for being awfully frank, you were talking a lot of nonsense."

Hugh leaned forward eagerly. He wasn't offended, and for the first time
that week he didn't feel that he was being rushed.

"Well, you have a lot of sentimental notions about fraternities that are
all bull; that's all. You think that the brothers are really brothers,
that they stick by each other and all that sort of thing. You seem to
think, too, that the fraternities are democratic. They aren't, or there
wouldn't be any fraternities. You don't seem to realize that
fraternities are among other things political organizations, fighting
each other on the campus for dear life. You've heard fraternities this
week knocking each other. Well, about nine tenths of what's been said is
either lies or true of every fraternity on the campus. These
fraternities aren't working together for the good of Sanford; they're
working like hell to ruin each other. You think that you are going to
like every man in the fraternity you join. You won't. You'll hate some
of them."

Hugh was aroused and indignant. "If you feel that way about it, why do
you stay in a fraternity?"

Graham smiled gravely. "Don't get angry, please. I stay because the
fraternity has its virtues as well as its faults. I hated the fraternity
the first two years, and I'm afraid that you're going to, too. You see,
I had the same sort of notions you have--and it hurt like the devil when
they were knocked into a cocked hat. The fraternity is a pleasant club:
it gets you into campus activities; and it gives you a social life in
college that you can't get without it. It isn't very important to most
men after they graduate. Just try to raise some money from the alumni
some time, and you'll find out. Some of them remain undergraduates all
their lives, and they think that the fraternity is important, but most
of them hardly think of it except when they come back to reunions.
They're more interested in their clubs or the Masons or something of
that sort."

"My father hasn't remained an undergraduate all his life, but he's
interested in the Nu Delts," Hugh countered vigorously.

"I suppose he is," Graham tactfully admitted, "but you'll find that most
men aren't. But that doesn't matter. You aren't an alumnus yet; you're a
freshman, and a fraternity is a darn nice thing to have around while you
are in college.

"What I am going to say now," he continued, hesitating, "is pretty
touchy, and I hope that you won't be offended. I have been trying to
impress on you that the fraternity is most important while you are in
college, and, believe me, it's damned important. A fellow has a hell of
a time if he gets into the wrong fraternity.... I am sure that you are
going to get a lot of bids. Don't choose hastily. Spend to-morrow
thinking the various bunches over--and choose the one that has the
fellows that you like best, no matter what its standing on the campus
is. Be sure that you like the fellows; that is all-important. We want
you to come to us. I think that you would fit in here, but I am not
going to urge you. Think us over. If you like us, accept our bid; if you
don't, go some fraternity where you do like the fellows. And that's my
warning about the Nu Delts. Be sure that you like the fellows, or most
of them, anyway, before you accept their bid. Have you thought them
over?"

"No," Hugh admitted, "I haven't."

He didn't like Graham's talk; he thought that it was merely very clever
rushing. He did Graham an injustice. Graham had been strongly attracted
to Hugh and felt sure that he would be making a serious mistake if he
joined Nu Delta. Hugh's reaction, however, was natural. He had been
rushed in dozens of ingenious ways for a week; he had little reason,
therefore, to trust Graham or anybody else.

Graham stood up. "I have a feeling, Carver," he said slowly, "that I
have flubbed this talk. I am sure that you'll know some day that I was
really disinterested and wanted to do my best for you."

Hugh was softened--and smiled shyly as he lifted himself out of his
chair. "I know you did," he said with more gratitude in his voice than
he quite felt, "and I'm very grateful, but I'm so woozy now that I
don't know what to think."

"I don't wonder. To tell you the truth, I am, too. I haven't got to bed
earlier than three o'clock any night this week, and right now I hardly
care if we pledge anybody to-morrow night." He continued talking as they
walked slowly down the stairs. "One more bit of advice. Don't go
anywhere else to-night. Go home to bed, and to-morrow think over what
I've told you. And," he added, holding out his hand, "even if you don't
come our way, I hope I see a lot of you before the end of the term."

Hugh clasped his hand. "You sure will. Thanks a lot. Good night."

"Good night."

Hugh did go straight to his room and tried to think, but the effort met
with little success. He wanted desperately to receive a bid from Nu
Delta, and if he didn't--well, nothing else much mattered. Graham's
assertion that Nu Delta would bid him no longer brought him any comfort.
Why should Graham know what Nu Delta was going to do?

Shortly after eleven Carl came in and threw himself wearily into a
chair. For a few minutes neither boy said anything; they stared into the
fire and frowned. Finally Carl spoke.

"I can go Alpha Sig if I want," he said softly.

Hugh looked up. "Good!" he exclaimed, honestly pleased. "But I hope we
can both go Nu Delt. Did they come right out and bid you?"

"Er--no. Not exactly. It's kinda funny." Carl obviously wanted to tell
something and didn't know how to go about it.

"What do you mean 'funny'? What happened?"

Carl shifted around in his chair nervously, filled his pipe, lighted it,
and then forgot to smoke.

"Well," he began slowly, "Morton--you know that Alpha Sig, Clem Morton,
the senior--well, he got me off into a corner to-night and talked to me
quite a while, shot me a heavy line of dope. At first I didn't get him
at all. He was talking about how they needed new living-room furniture
and that sort of thing. Finally I got him. It's like this--well, it's
this way: they need money. Oh, hell! Hugh, don't you see? They want
money--and they know I've got it. All I've got to do is to let them know
that I'll make the chapter a present of a thousand or two after
initiation--and I can be an Alpha Sig."

Hugh was sitting tensely erect and staring at Carl dazedly.

"You mean," he asked slowly, "that they want you to buy your way in?"

Carl gave a short, hard laugh. "Well, nobody said anything vulgar like
that, Hugh, but you've got the big idea."

"The dirty pups! The goddamn stinkers! I hope you told Morton to go
straight to hell." Hugh jumped up and stood over Carl excitedly.

"Keep your shirt on, Hugh. No, I didn't tell him to go to hell. I didn't
say anything, but I know that all I've got to do to get an Alpha Sig bid
to-morrow night is to let Morton know that I'd like to make the chapter
a present. And I'm not sure--but I think maybe I'll do it."

"What!" Hugh cried. "You wouldn't, Carl! You know damn well you
wouldn't." He was almost pleading.

"Hey, quit yelling and sit down." He got up, shoved Hugh back into his
chair, and then sat down again. "I want to make one of the Big Three;
I've got to. I don't believe that either Nu Delt or Kappa Zete is going
to bid me. See? This is my only chance--and I think that I'm going to
take it." He spoke deliberately, staring pensively into the fire.

"I don't see how you can even think of such a thing," Hugh said in
painful wonderment. "Why, I'd rather never join a fraternity than buy
myself into one."

"You aren't me."

"No, I'm not you. Listen, Carl." Hugh turned in his chair and faced
Carl, who kept his eyes on the dying fire. "I'm going to say something
awfully mean, but I hope you won't get mad.... You remember you told
me once that you weren't a gentleman. I didn't believe you, but if you
buy yourself into that--that bunch of--of gutter-pups, I'll--I'll--oh,
hell, Carl, I'll have to believe it." He was painfully embarrassed, very
much in earnest, and dreadfully unhappy.

"I told you that I wasn't a gentleman," Carl said sullenly. "Now you
know it."

"I don't know anything of the sort. I'll never believe that you could do
such a thing." He stood up again and leaned over Carl, putting his hand
on his shoulder. "Listen, Carl," he said soberly, earnestly, "I promise
that I won't go Nu Delt or any other fraternity unless they take you,
too, if you'll promise me not to go Alpha Sig."

Carl looked up wonderingly. "What!" he exclaimed. "You'll turn down Nu
Delt if they don't bid me, too?"

"Yes, Nu Delt or Kappa Zete or any other bunch. Promise me," he urged;
"promise me."

Carl understood the magnitude of the sacrifice offered, and his eyes
became dangerously soft. "God! you're white, Hugh," he whispered
huskily, "white as hell. You go Nu Delt if they ask you--but I promise
you that I won't go Alpha Sig even if they bid me without pay." He held
out his hand, and Hugh gripped it hard. "I promise," he repeated, "on my
word of honor."

At seven o'clock Saturday evening every freshman who had any reason at
all to think that he would get a bid--and some that had no
reason--collected in nervous groups in the living-room of the Union. At
the stroke of seven they were permitted to move up to a long row of
tables which were covered with large envelopes, one for every freshman.
They were arranged in alphabetical order, and in an incredibly short
time each man found the one addressed to him. Some of the envelopes were
stuffed with cards, each containing the freshman's name and the name of
the fraternity bidding him; some of them contained only one or two
cards--and some of them were empty. The boys who drew empty envelopes
instantly left the Union without a word to anybody; the others tried to
find a free space where they could scan their cards unobserved. They
were all wildly excited and nervous. One glance at the cards, and their
faces either lighted with joy or went white with disappointment.

Hugh found ten cards in his envelope--and one of them had Nu Delta
written on it. His heart leaped; for a moment he thought that he was
going to cry. Then he rushed around the Union looking for Carl. He found
him staring at a fan of cards, which he was holding like a hand of
bridge.

"What luck?" Hugh cried.

Carl handed him the cards. "Lamp those," he said, "and then explain.
They've got me stopped."

He had thirteen bids, one from every fraternity in good standing,
including the so-called Big Three.

When Hugh saw the Nu Delta card he yelled with delight.

"I got a Nu Delt, too." His voice was trembling with excitement. "You'll
go with me, won't you?"

"Of course, Hugh. But I don't understand."

"Oh, what's the dif? Let's go."

He tucked his arm in Carl's, and the two of them passed out of the Union
on their way to the Nu Delta house. Later both of them understood.

Carl's good looks, his excellent clothes, his money, and the fact that
he had been to an expensive preparatory school were enough to insure him
plenty of bids even if he had been considerably less of a gentleman than
he was.

Already the campus was ringing with shouts as freshmen entered
fraternity houses, each freshman being required to report at once to the
fraternity whose bid he was accepting.

When Carl and Hugh walked up the Nu Delta steps, they were seized by
waiting upper-classmen and rushed into the living-room, where they were
received with loud cheers, slapped on the back, and passed around the
room, each upper-classman shaking hands with them so vigorously that
their hands hurt for an hour afterward. What pleasant pain! Each new
arrival was similarly received, but the excitement did not last long.
Both the freshmen and the upper-classmen were too tired to keep the
enthusiasm at the proper pitch. At nine o'clock the freshmen were sent
home with orders to report the next evening at eight.

Carl and Hugh, proudly conscious of the pledge buttons in the lapels of
their coats, walked slowly across the campus, spent and weary, but
exquisitely happy.

"They bid me on account of you," Carl said softly. "They didn't think
they could get you unless they asked me, too."

"No," Hugh replied, "you're wrong. They took you for yourself. They knew
you would go where I did, and they were sure that I would go their way."

Hugh was quite right. The Nu Deltas had felt sure of both of them and
had not rushed them harder because they were too busy to waste any time
on certainties.

Carl stopped suddenly. "God, Hugh," he exclaimed. "Just suppose I had
offered the Alpha Sigs that cash. God!"

"Aren't you glad you didn't?" Hugh asked happily.

"Glad? Glad? Boy, I'm bug-house. And," he added softly, "I know the lad
I've got to thank."

"Aw, go to hell."

       *       *       *       *       *

The initiation season lasted two weeks, and the neophytes found that the
dormitory initiations had been merely child's play. They had to account
for every hour, and except for a brief time allowed every day for
studying, they were kept busy making asses of themselves for the
delectation of the upper-classmen.

In the Nu Delta house a freshman had to be on guard every hour of the
day up to midnight. He was forced to dress himself in some outlandish
costume, the more outlandish the better, and announce every one who
entered or left the house. "Mr. Standish entering," he would bawl, or,
"Mr. Kerwin leaving." If he bawled too loudly, he was paddled; if he
didn't bawl loudly enough, he was paddled; and if there was no fault to
be found with his bawling; he was paddled anyway. Every freshman had to
supply his own paddle, a broad, stout oak affair sold at the cooperative
store at a handsome profit.

If a freshman reported for duty one minute late, he was paddled; if he
reported one minute early, he was paddled. There was no end to the
paddling. "Assume the angle," an upper-classman would roar. The
unfortunate freshman then humbly bent forward, gripped his ankles with
his hands--and waited. The worst always happened. The upper-classman
brought the paddle down with a resounding whack on the seat of the
freshman's trousers.

"Does it hurt?"

"Yes, sir."

Another resounding whack. "_What?_"

"No--no, sir."

"Oh, well, if it doesn't hurt, I might as well give you another one."
And he gave him another one.

A freshman was paddled if he forgot to say "sir" to an upper-classman;
he was paddled if he neglected to touch the floor with his fingers every
time he passed through a door in the fraternity house; he was paddled if
he laughed when an upper-classman told a joke, and he was paddled if he
didn't laugh; he was paddled if he failed to return from an errand in an
inconceivably short time: he was paddled for every and no reason, but
mainly because the upper-classmen, the sophomores particularly, got
boundless delight out of doing the paddling.

Every night a freshman stood on the roof of the Nu Delta house and
announced the time every fifteen seconds. "One minute and fifteen
seconds after nine, and all's well in the halls of Nu Delta; one minute
and thirty seconds after nine, and all's well in the halls of Nu Delta;
one minute and forty-five seconds after nine, and all's well in the
halls of Nu Delta," and so on for an hour. Then he was relieved by
another freshman, who took up the chant.

Nightly the freshmen had to entertain the upper-classmen, and if the
entertainment wasn't satisfactory, as it never was, the entertainers
were paddled. They had to run races, shoving pennies across the floor
with their noses. The winner was paddled for going too fast--"Didn't he
have any sense of sportsmanship?"--and the loser was paddled for going
too slow. Most of the freshmen lost skin off their noses and foreheads;
all of them shivered at the sight of a paddle. By the end of the first
week they were whispering to each other how many blisters they had on
their buttocks.

It was a bitterly cold night in late February when the Nu Deltas took
the freshmen for their "walk." They drove in automobiles fifteen miles
into the country and then left the freshmen to walk back. It was four
o'clock in the morning when the miserable freshmen reached the campus,
half frozen, unutterably weary, but thankful that the end of the
initiation was at hand.

Hugh was thankful for another thing; the Nu Deltas did not brand. He had
noticed several men in the swimming-pool with tiny Greek letters branded
on their chests or thighs. The branded ones seemed proud of their
permanent insignia, but the idea of a fraternity branding its members
like beef-cattle was repugnant to Hugh. He told Carl that he was darn
glad the Nu Deltas were above that sort of thing, and, surprisingly,
Carl agreed with him.

The next night they were formally initiated. The Nu Delta house seemed
strangely quiet; levity was strictly prohibited. The freshmen were given
white robes such as the upper-classmen were wearing, the president
excepted, who wore a really handsome robe of blue and silver.

Then they marched up-stairs to the "goat room." Once there, the
president mounted a dais; a "brother" stood on each side of him. Hugh
was so much impressed by the ritual, the black hangings of the room, the
fraternity seal over the dais, the ornate chandelier, the long speeches
of the president and his assistants, that he failed to notice that many
of the brothers were openly bored.

Eventually each freshman was led forward by an upper-classman. He knelt
on the lowest step of the dais and repeated after the president the oath
of allegiance. Then one of the assisting brothers whispered to him the
password and taught him the "grip," a secret and elaborate method of
shaking hands, while the other pinned the jeweled pin to his vest.

When each freshman had been received into the fraternity, the entire
chapter marched in twos down-stairs, singing the fraternity song. The
initiation was over; Carl and Hugh were Nu Delts.

The whole ceremony had moved Hugh deeply, so deeply that he had hardly
been able to repeat the oath after the president. He thought the ritual
very beautiful, more beautiful even than the Easter service at church.
He left the Nu Delta house that night feeling a deeper loyalty for the
fraternity than he had words to express. He and Carl walked back to
Surrey 19 in silence. Neither was capable of speech, though both of them
wanted to give expression to their emotion in some way. They reached
their room.

"Well," said Hugh shyly, "I guess I'll go to bed."

"Me, too." Then Carl moved hesitatingly to where Hugh was standing. He
held out his hand and grinned, but his eyes were serious.

"Good night--brother."

Their hands met in the sacred grip.

"Good night--brother."




CHAPTER XIII


To Hugh the remainder of the term was simply a fight to get an
opportunity to study. The old saying, "if study interferes with college,
cut out study," did not appeal to him. He honestly wanted to do good
work, but he found that the chance to do it was rare. Some one always
seemed to be in his room eager to talk; there was the fraternity meeting
to attend every Monday night; early in the term there was at least one
hockey or basketball game a week; later there were track meets, baseball
games, and tennis matches; he had to attend Glee Club rehearsals twice a
week; he ran every afternoon either in the gymnasium or on the cinder
path; some one always seduced him into going to the movies; he was
constantly being drawn into bull sessions; there was an occasional
concert: and besides all these distractions, there was a fraternity
dance, the excitement of Prom, a trip to three cities with the Glee
Club, and finally a week's vacation at home at Easter.

Worst of all, none of his instructors was inspiring. He had been
assigned to a new section in Latin, and in losing Alling he lost the one
really enjoyable teacher he had had. The others were conscientious,
more or less competent, but there was little enthusiasm in their
teaching, nothing to make a freshman eager either to attend their
classes or to study the lessons they assigned. They did not make the
acquiring of knowledge a thrilling experience; they made it a duty--and
Hugh found that duty exceedingly irksome.

He attended neither the fraternity dance nor the Prom. He had looked
forward enthusiastically to the "house dance," but after he had, along
with the other men in his delegation, cleaned the house from garret to
basement, he suddenly took to his bed with grippe. He groaned with
despair when Carl gave him glowing accounts of the dance and the
"janes." Carl for once, however, was circumspect; he did not tell Hugh
all that happened. He would have been hard put to explain his own
reticence, but although he thought "the jane who got pie-eyed" had been
enormously funny, he decided not to tell Hugh about her or the pie-eyed
brothers.

No freshman was allowed to attend the Prom, but along with the other men
who weren't "dragging women" Hugh walked the streets and watched the
girls. There was a tea-dance at the fraternity house during Prom week.
Hugh said that he got a great kick out of it, but, as a matter of fact,
he remained only a short time; there was a hectic quality to both the
girls and the talk that confused him. For some reason he didn't like the
atmosphere; and he didn't know why. His excuse to the brothers and to
himself for leaving early was that he was in training and not supposed
to dance.

Track above all things was absorbing his interest. He could hardly think
of anything else. He lay awake nights dreaming of the race he would run
against Raleigh. Sanford had three dual track meets a year, but the
first two were with small colleges and considered of little importance.
Only a point winner in the Raleigh meet was granted his letter.

Hugh won the hundred in the sophomore-freshman meet and in a meet with
the Raleigh freshmen, so that he was given his class numerals. He did
nothing, however, in the Raleigh meet; he was much too nervous to run
well, breaking three times at the mark. He was set back two yards and
was never able to regain them. For a time he was bitterly despondent,
but he soon cheered up when he thought of the three years ahead of him.

Spring brought first rain and slush and then the "sings." There was a
fine stretch of lawn in the center of the campus, and on clear nights
the students gathered there for a sing, one class on each side of the
lawn. First the seniors sang a college song, then the juniors, then the
sophomores, and then the freshmen. After each song, the other classes
cheered the singers, except when the sophomores and freshmen sang: they
always "razzed" each other. Hugh led the freshmen, and he never failed
to get a thrill out of singing a clear note and hearing his classmates
take it up.

After each class had sung three or four songs, the boys gathered in the
center of the lawn, sang the college hymn, gave a cheer, and the sing
was over.

On such nights, however, the singing really continued for hours. The
Glee Club often sang from the Union steps; groups of boys wandered arm
in arm around the campus singing; on every fraternity steps there were
youths strumming banjos and others "harmonizing": here, there,
everywhere young voices were lifted in song--not joyous nor jazzy but
plaintive and sentimental. Adeline's sweetness was extolled by unsure
barytones and "whisky" tenors; and the charms of Rosie O'Grady were
chanted in "close harmony" in every corner of the campus:


                "Sweet Rosie O'Grady,
                 She's my pretty rose;
                 She's my pretty lady,
                 As every one knows.
                 And when we are married,
                 Oh, how happy we'll be,
                 For I love sweet Rosie O'Grady
                 And Rosie O'Grady loves me."


Hugh loved those nights: the shadows of the elms, the soft spring
moonlight, the twanging banjos, the happy singing. He would never, so
long as he lived, hear "Rosie O'Grady" without surrendering to a tender,
sentimental mood; that song would always mean the campus and singing
youth.

Suddenly examinations threw their baleful influence over the campus
again. Once more the excitement, but not so great this time, the
cramming, the rumors of examinations "getting out," the seminars, the
tutoring sections, the nervousness, the fear.

Hugh, however, was surer of himself than he had been the first term, and
although he had no reason to be proud of the grades he received, he was
not particularly ashamed of them.

He and Carl left the same day but by different trains. They had agreed
to room together again in Surrey 19; so they didn't feel that the
parting for the summer was very important.

"You'll write, won't you, old man?"

"Sure, Hugh--surest thing you know. Say, it don't seem possible that our
freshman year's over already. Why, hell, Hugh, we're sophomores."

"So we are! What do you know about that?" Hugh's eyes shone. "Gosh!"

Carl looked at his watch. "Hell, I've got to beat it." He picked up his
suit-case, dropped it, shook hands vigorously with Hugh, snatched up his
suit-case, and was off with a final, "Good-by, Hugh, old boy," sounding
behind him.

Hugh settled back into a chair. He had half an hour to wait.

"A sophomore.... Gosh!"




CHAPTER XIV


Hugh spent the summer at home, working on the farm, reading a little,
and occasionally visiting a lake summer resort a few miles away. Helen
had left Merrytown to attend a secretarial school in a neighboring city,
and Hugh was genuinely glad to find her gone when he returned from
college. Helen was becoming not only a bore but a problem. Besides, he
met a girl at Corley Lake, the summer resort, whom he found much more
fascinating. For a month or two he thought that he was in love with
Janet Harton. Night after night he drove to Corley Lake in his father's
car, sometimes dancing with Janet in the pavilion, sometimes canoeing
with her on the lake, sometimes taking her for long rides in the car,
but often merely wandering through the pines with her or sitting on the
shore of the lake and staring at the rippling water.

Janet was small and delicate; she seemed almost fragile. She did
everything daintily--like a little girl playing tea-party. Her hands and
feet were exquisitely small, her features childlike and indefinite,
except her little coral mouth, which was as clearly outlined with color
as a doll's and as mobile as a fluttering leaf. She had wide blue eyes
and hair that was truly golden. Strangely, she had not bobbed it but
wore it bound into a shining coil around her head.

Hugh wrote a poem to her. It began thus:


                Maiden with the clear blue eyes,
                Lady with the golden hair,
                Exquisite child, serenely wise,
                Sweetly tender, morning fair.


He wasn't sure that it was a very good poem; there was something
reminiscent about the first line, and he was dubious about "morning
fair." He had, however, studied German for a year in high school, and he
guessed that if _morgenschoen_ was all right in German it was all right
in English, too.

They rarely talked. Hugh was content to sit for hours with the delicate
child nestling in his arm, her hand lying passive and cool in his. She
made him feel very strong and protective. Nights, he dreamed of doing
brave deeds for her, of saving her from terrible dangers. At first her
vague, fleeting kisses thrilled him, but as the weeks went by and his
passion grew, he found them strangely unsatisfying.

When she cuddled her lovely head in the hollow of his shoulder, he
would lean forward and whisper: "Kiss me, Janet. Kiss me." Obediently
she would turn her face upward, her little mouth pursed into a coral
bud, but if he held her too tightly or prolonged the kiss, she pushed
him away or turned her face. Then he felt repelled, chilled. She kissed
him much as she kissed her mother every night, and he wanted--well he
didn't quite know what he did want except that he didn't want to be
kissed _that_ way.

Finally he protested. "What's the matter, Janet?" he asked gently.
"Don't you love me?"

"Of course," she answered calmly in her small flute-like voice; "of
course I love you, but you are so rough. You mustn't kiss me hard like
that; it isn't nice."

Nice! Hugh felt as if she had slapped his face. Then he knew that she
didn't understand at all. He tried to excuse her by telling himself that
she was just a child--she was within a year of his own age--and that she
would love him the way he did her when she grew older; but down in his
heart he sensed the fact that she wasn't capable of love, that she
merely wanted to be petted and caressed as a child did. The shadows and
the moonlight did not move her as they did him, and she thought that he
was silly when he said that he could hear a song in the night breeze.
She had said that his poem was very pretty. That was all. Well, maybe
it wasn't a very good poem, but it had--well, it had--it had something
in it that wasn't just pretty.

He began to visit the lake less often and to wish that September and the
opening of college would arrive. When the day finally came to return, he
was almost as much excited as he had been the year before. Gosh! it
would be good to see Carl again. The bum had written only once. Yeah,
and Pudge Jamieson, too, and Larry Stillwell, and Bill Freeman,
and--yes, by golly! Merton Billings. He'd be glad to see old Fat
Billings. He wondered if Merton was as fat as ever and as pure. And all
the brothers at the Nu Delta house. He'd been too busy to get really
acquainted with them last year; but this year, by gosh, he'd get to know
all of them. It certainly would be great to be back and be a sophomore
and make the little frosh stand around.

He didn't carry his suit-case up the hill this time; he checked it and
sent a freshman for it later. When he arrived at Surrey 19 Carl was
already there--and he was kneeling before a trunk when Hugh walked into
the room. Both of them instantly remembered the identical scene of the
year before.

Carl jumped to his feet. "Hullo--who are you?" he demanded, his face
beaming.

Hugh pretended to be frightened and shy. "I'm Hugh Carver. I--I guess
I'm going to room with you."

"You sure are!" yelled Carl, jumping over the trunk and landing on Hugh.
"God! I'm glad to see you. Put it there." They shook hands and stared at
each other with shining eyes.

Then they began to talk, interrupting each other, gesticulating,
occasionally slapping each other violently on the back or knee, shouting
with laughter as one of them told of a summer experience that struck
them as funny. They were both so glad to get back to college, so glad to
see each other, that they were almost hysterical. And when they left
Surrey 19 arm in arm on their way to the Nu Delta house "to see the
brothers," their cup of bliss was full to the brim and running over.

"Criminy, the ol' campus sure does look good," said Hugh ecstatically.
"Watch the frosh work." He was suddenly reminded of something. "Hey,
freshman!" he yelled at a big, red-faced youngster who was to be
full-back on the football team a year hence.

The freshman came on a run. "Yes--yes, sir?"

"Here's a check. Take it down to the station and get my suit-case. Take
it up to Surrey Nineteen and put it in the room. The door's open. Hurry
up now; I'm going to want it pretty soon."

"Yes, sir. I'll hurry." And the freshman was off running.

Hugh and Carl grinned at each other, linked arms again, and continued
their way across the campus. When they entered the Nu Delta house a
shout went up. "Hi, Carl! Hi, Hugh! Glad to see you back. Didya have a
good summer? Put it there, ol' kid"--and they shook hands, gripping each
other's forearm at the same time.

       *       *       *       *       *

Hugh tried hard to become a typical sophomore and failed rather badly.
He retained much of the shyness and diffidence that gives the freshman
his charm, and he did not succeed very well in acquiring the swagger,
the cocky, patronizing manner, the raucous self-assurance that
characterize the true sophomore.

He found, too, that he couldn't lord it over the freshmen very well, and
at times he was nothing less than a renegade to his class. He was
constantly giving freshmen correct information about their problems, and
during the dormitory initiations he more than once publicly objected to
some "stunt" that seemed to him needlessly insulting to the initiates.
Because he was an athlete, his opinion was respected, and quite
unintentionally he won several good friends among the freshmen. His
objections had all been spontaneous, and he was rather sorry about them
afterward. He felt that he must be soft, that he ought to be able to
stand anything that anybody else could. Further, he felt that there
must be something wrong with his sense of humor; things that struck lots
of his classmates as funny seemed merely disgusting to him.

He wanted very much to tell Carl about Janet, but for several weeks the
opportunity did not present itself. There was too much excitement about
the campus; the mood of the place was all wrong, and Hugh, although he
didn't know it, was very sensitive to moods and atmosphere.

Finally one night in October he and Carl were seated in their big chairs
before the fire. They had been walking that afternoon, and Hugh had been
swept outside of himself by the brilliance of the autumn foliage. He was
emotionally and physically tired, feeling that vague, melancholy
happiness that comes after an intense but pleasant experience. Carl
leaned back to the center-table and switched off the study light.

"Pleasanter with just the firelight," he said quietly. He, too, had
something that he wanted to tell, and the less light the better.

Hugh sighed and relaxed comfortably into his chair. The shadows were
thick and mysterious behind them; the flames leaped merrily in the
fireplace. Both boys sat silent, staring into the fire.

Finally Hugh spoke.

"I met a girt this summer, Carl," he said softly.

"Yeah?"

"Yeah. Little peach. Awf'lly pretty. Dainty, you know. Awf'lly
dainty--like a little kid. You know."

Carl had slumped down into his chair. He was smoking his pipe and
staring pensively at the flames. "Un-huh. Go on."

"Well, I fell pretty hard. She was so--er, dainty. She always reminded
me of a little girl playing lady. She had golden hair and blue eyes, the
bluest eyes I've ever seen; oh, lots bluer than mine, lots bluer. And
little bits of hands and feet."

Carl continued to puff his pipe and stare at the fire. "Pet?" he asked
dreamily.

"Uh-huh. Yeah, she petted--but she was kinda funny--cold, you know, and
kinda scared. Gee, Carl, I was crazy about her. I--I even wrote her a
poem. I guess it wasn't very good, but I don't think she knew what it
was about. I guess I'm off her now, though. She's too cold. I don't want
a girl to fall over me--my last girl did that--but, golly, Carl, Janet
didn't understand. I don't think she knows anything about love."

"Some of 'em don't," Carl remarked philosophically, slipping deeper into
his chair. "They just pet."

"That's the way she was. She liked me to hold her and kiss her just as
long as I acted like a big brother, but, criminy, when I felt that soft
little thing in my arms, I didn't feel like a big brother; I loved her
like hell.... She was awfully sweet," he added regretfully; "I wish she
wasn't so cold."

"Hard luck, old man," said Carl consolingly, "hard luck. Guess you
picked an iceberg."

For a few minutes the room was quiet except for the crackling of the
fire, which was beginning to burn low. The shadows were creeping up on
the boys; the flames were less merry.

Carl took his pipe out of his mouth and drawled softly, "I had better
luck."

Hugh pricked up his ears. "You haven't really fallen in love, have you?"
he demanded eagerly. Carl had often said that he would never fall in
love, that he was "too wise" to women.

"No, I didn't fall in love; nothing like that. I met a bunch of janes
down at Bar Harbor. Some of them I'd known before, but I met some new
ones, too. Had a damn good time. Some of those janes certainly could
neck, and they were ready for it any time. Gee, if the old lady hadn't
been there, I'd a been potted about half the time. As it was, I drank
enough gin and Scotch to float a battle-ship. Well, the old lady had to
go to New York on account of some business; so I went down to Christmas
Cove to visit some people I know there. Christmas Cove's a nice place;
not so high-hat as Bar Harbor, but still it's a nice place."

Hugh felt that Carl was leaving the main track, and he hastened to
shunt him back. "Sure," he said in cheerful agreement; "sure it is--but
what happened?"

"What happened? Oh--oh, yes!" Carl brought himself back to the present
with an obvious effort. "Sure, I'll tell you what happened. Well, there
was a girl there named Elaine Marston. She wasn't staying with the folks
I was, but they knew her, so I saw a lot of her. See?"

"Sure." Hugh wished he would hurry up. Carl didn't usually wander all
over when telling a story. This must be something special.

"Well, I saw lots of her. Lots. Pretty girl, nice family and everything,
but she liked her booze and she liked to pet. Awful hot kid. Well, one
night we went to a dance, and between dances we had a lot of gin I had
brought with me. Good stuff, too. I bought it off a guy who brought it
down from Canada himself. Where was I? Oh, yes, at the dance. We both
got pie-eyed; I was all liquored up, and I guess she was, too. After the
dance was over, I dared her to walk over to South Bristol--that's just
across the island, you know--and then walk back again. Well, we hadn't
gone far when we decided to sit down. We were both kinda dizzy from the
gin. You have to go through the woods, you know, and it's dark as hell
in there at night.... We sat down among some ferns and I began to pet
her. Don't know why--just did.... Oh, hell! what's the use of going
into details? You can guess what happened."

Hugh sat suddenly erect. "You didn't--"

Carl stood up and stretched. "Yeah," he yawned, "I did it. Lots of times
afterwards."

Hugh was dazed. He didn't know what to think. For an instant he was
shocked, and then he was envious. "Wonder if Janet would have gone the
whole way," flitted across his mind. He instantly dismissed the
question; he felt that it wasn't fair to Janet. But Carl? Gosh!

Carl yawned again. "Great stuff," he said nonchalantly. "Sleepy as hell.
Guess I'll hit the hay." He eyed Hugh suspiciously. "You aren't shocked,
are you? You don't think I'm a moral leper or anything like that?" He
attempted to be light but wasn't altogether successful.

"Of course not." Hugh denied the suggestion vehemently, and yet down in
his heart he felt a keen disappointment. He hardly knew why he was
disappointed, but he was. "Going to bed?" he asked as casually as he
could.

"Yeah. Good night."

"Good night, old man."

Each boy went to his own bedroom, Hugh to go to bed and think Carl's
story over. It thrilled him, and he envied Carl, and yet--and yet he
wished Carl hadn't done it. It made him and Carl different--sorta not
the same; no that wasn't it. He didn't know just what the trouble was,
but there was a sharp sting of disillusionment that hurt. He would have
been more confused had he known what was happening in Carl's room.

Carl had walked into his own bedroom, lighted the light, and closed the
door. Then he walked to the dresser and stared at himself in the mirror,
stared a long time as if the face were somehow new to him.

There was a picture of the "old lady" on the dresser. It caught his eye,
and he flinched. It seemed to look at him reproachfully. He thought of
his mother, and he thought of how he had bluffed Hugh. He had cried
after his first experience with the girl.

He looked again into the mirror. "You goddamn hypocrite," he said
softly; "you goddamn hypocrite." His lip curled in contempt at his
image.

He began to undress rapidly. The eyes of the "old lady" in the picture
seemed to follow him around the room. The thought of her haunted him.
Desperately, he switched out the light.

Once in bed, he rolled over on his stomach and buried his face in the
pillow. "God!" he whispered. "God!"




CHAPTER XV


Sanford defeated Raleigh this year in football, and for a time the
college was wild with excitement and delight. Most of the free lumber in
Haydensville was burned in a triumphant bonfire, and many of the
undergraduates celebrated so joyously with their winnings that they
looked sadly bedraggled for several days afterward.

The victory was discussed until the boys were thoroughly sick of it, and
then they settled down to a normal life, studying; playing pool,
billiards, and cards; going to the movies, reading a little, and holding
bull sessions.

Hugh attended many bull sessions. Some of them he found interesting, but
many of them were merely orgies of filthy talk, the participants vying
with one another in telling the dirtiest stories; and although Hugh was
not a prig, he was offended by a dirty story that was told merely for
the sake of its dirt. Pudge Jamieson's stories were smutty, but they
were funny, too, and he could send Hugh into paroxysms of laughter any
time that he chose.

One night in late November Hugh was in Gordon Ross's room in Surrey
along with four others. Ross was a senior, a quiet man with gray eyes,
rather heavy features, and soft brown hair. He was considerably older
than the others, having worked for several years before he came to
college. He listened to the stories that were being told, occasionally
smiled, but more often studied the group curiously.

The talk became exceedingly nasty, and Hugh was about to leave in
disgust when the discussion suddenly turned serious.

"Do you know," said George Winsor abruptly, "I wonder why we hold these
smut sessions. I sit here and laugh like a fool and am ashamed of myself
half the time. And this isn't the only smut session that's going on
right now. I bet there's thirty at least going on around the campus. Why
are we always getting into little groups and covering each other with
filth? College men are supposed to be gentlemen, and we talk like a lot
of gutter-pups." Winsor was a sophomore, a fine student, and thoroughly
popular. He looked like an unkempt Airedale. His clothes, even when new,
never looked neat, and his rusty hair refused to lie flat. He had an
eager, quick way about him, and his brown eyes were very bright and
lively.

"Yes, that's what I want to know," Hugh chimed in, forgetting all about
his desire to leave. "I'm always sitting in on bull sessions, but I
think they re rotten. About every so often I make up my mind that I
won't take part in another one, and before I know it somebody's telling
me the latest and I'm listening for all I'm worth."

"That's easy,"' Melville Burbank answered. He was a junior with a
brilliant record. "You're merely sublimating your sex instincts, that's
all. If you played around with cheap women more, you wouldn't be
thinking about sex all the time and talking smut."

"You're crazy!" It was Keith Nutter talking, a sophomore notorious for
his dissipations. "Hell, I'm out with bags all the time, as you damn
well know. My sex instincts don't need sublimating, or whatever you call
it, and I talk smut as much as anybody--more than some."

"Perhaps you're just naturally dirty," Burbank said, his voice edged
with sarcasm. He didn't like Nutter. The boy seemed gross to him.

"Go to hell! I'm no dirtier than anybody else." Nutter was not only
angry but frankly hurt. "The only difference between me and the rest of
you guys is that I admit that I chase around with rats, and the rest of
you do it on the sly. I'm no hypocrite."

"Oh, come off, Keith," Gordon Ross said quietly; "you're not fair. I
admit that lots of the fellows are chasing around with rats on the sly,
but lots of them aren't, too. More fellows go straight around this
college than you think. I know a number that have never touched a woman.
They just hate to admit they're pure, that's all; and you take their
bluff for the real thing."

"You've got to show me." Nutter was almost sullen. "I admit that I'm no
angel, but I don't believe that I'm a damn bit worse than the average.
Besides, what's wrong about it, anyhow? It's just as natural as eating,
and I don't see where there is anything worse about it."

George Winsor stood up and leaned against the mantel. He ran his fingers
through his hair until it stood grotesquely on end. "Oh, that's the old
argument. I've heard it debated in a hundred bull sessions. One fellow
says it's all wrong, and another fellow says it's all right, and you
never get anywhere. I want somebody to tell me what's wrong about it and
what's right. God knows you don't find out in your classes. They have
Doc Conners give those smut talks to us in our freshman year, and a
devil of a lot of good they do. A bunch of fellows faint and have to be
lugged out, and the Doc gives you some sickening details about venereal
diseases, and that's as far as you get. Now, I'm all messed up about
this sex business, and I'll admit that I'm thinking about it all the
time, too. Some fellows say it's all right to have a woman, and some
fellows say it's all wrong, but I notice none of them have any use for a
woman who isn't straight."

All of the boys were sitting in easy-chairs except Donald Ferguson, who
was lying on the couch and listening in silence. He was a handsome youth
with Scotch blue eyes and sandy hair. Women were instantly attracted by
his good looks, splendid physique, slow smile, and quiet drawl.

He spoke for the first time. "The old single-standard fight," he said,
propping his head on his hand. "I don't see any sense in scrapping about
that any more. We've got a single standard now. The girls go just as
fast as the fellows."

"Oh, that's not so," Hugh exclaimed. "Girls don't go as far as fellows."

Ferguson smiled pleasantly at Hugh and drawled; "Shut up, innocent; you
don't know anything about it. I tell you the old double standard has
gone all to hell."

"You're exaggerating, Don, just to get Hugh excited," Ross said in his
quiet way. "There are plenty of decent girls. Just because a lot of them
pet on all occasions isn't any reason to say that they aren't straight.
I'm older than you fellows, and I guess I've had a lot more experience
than most of you. I've had to make my own way since I was a kid, and
I've bumped up against a lot of rough customers. I worked in a lumber
camp for a year, and after you've been with a gang like that for a
while, you'll understand the difference between them and college
fellows. Those boys are bad eggs. They just haven't any morals, that's
all. They turn into beasts every pay night; and bad as some of our
college parties are, they aren't a circumstance to a lumber town on pay
night."

"That's no argument," George Winsor said excitedly, taking his pipe out
of his mouth and gesticulating with it. "Just because a lumberjack is a
beast is no reason that a college man is all right because he's less of
a beast. I tell you I get sick of my own thoughts, and I get sick of the
college when I hear about some things that are done. I keep straight,
and I don't know why I do, I despise about half the fellows that chase
around with rats, and sometimes I envy them like hell. Well, what's the
sense in me keeping straight? What's the sense in anybody keeping
straight? Fellows that don't seem to get along just as well as those
that do. What do you think, Mel? You've been reading Havelock Ellis and
a lot of ducks like that."

Burbank tossed a cigarette butt into the fire and gazed into the flames
for a minute before speaking, his homely face serious and troubled. "I
don't know what to think," he replied slowly. "Ellis tells about some
things that make you fairly sick. So does Forel. The human race can be
awfully rotten. I've been thinking about it a lot, and I'm all mixed up.
Sometimes life just doesn't seem worth living to me, what with the filth
and the slums and the greed and everything. I've been taking a course
in sociology, and some of the things that Prof Davis has been telling us
make you wonder why the world goes on at all. Some poet has a line
somewhere about man's inhumanity to man, and I find myself thinking
about that all the time. The world's rotten as hell, and I don't see how
anything can be done about it. I don't think sometimes that it's worth
living in. I can understand why people commit suicide." He spoke softly,
gazing into the fire.

Hugh had given him rapt attention. Suddenly he spoke up, forgetting his
resolve not to say anything more after Ferguson had called him
"innocent." "I think you're wrong, Mel," he said positively. "I was
reading a book the other day called 'Lavengro.' It's all about Gipsies.
Well, this fellow Lavengro was all busted up and depressed; he's just
about made up his mind to commit suicide when he meets a friend of his,
a Gipsy. He tells the Gipsy that he's going to bump himself off, that he
doesn't see anything in life to live for. Then the Gipsy answers him.
Gee, it hit me square in the eye, and I memorized it on the spot. I
think I can say it. He says: 'There's night and day, brother, both sweet
things; sun, moon, and stars, brother, all sweet things; there's
likewise a wind on the heath. Life is very sweet, brother; who would
wish to die?' I think that's beautiful," he added simply, "and I think
it's true, too."

"Good for you, Hugh," Ross said quietly.

Hugh blushed with pleasure, but he was taken back by Nutter's vigorous
rejoinder. "Bunk!" he exclaimed. "Hooey! The sun, moon, and stars, and
all that stuff sounds pretty, but it isn't life. Life's earning a
living, and working like hell, and women, and pleasure. The 'Rubaiyat'
's the only poem--if you're going to quote poetry. That's the only poem
I ever saw that had any sense to it.


          "Come, Beloved, fill the Cup that clears
           To-day of past Regrets and future Fears.
           To-morrow? Why, To-morrow I may be
           Myself with Yesterday's seven thousand Years.


You bet. You never can tell when you're going to be bumped off, and so
you might just as well have a good time while you can. You damn well
don't know what's coming after you kick the bucket."

"Good stuff, the 'Rubaiyat,'" said Ferguson lazily. He was lying on his
back staring at the ceiling. "I bet I've read it a hundred times. When
they turn down an empty glass for me, it's going to be _empty_. I don't
know what I'm here for or where I'm going or why. 'Into this world and
why not knowing,' and so on. My folks sent me to Sunday-school and
brought me up to be a good little boy. I believed just about everything
they told me until I came to college. Now I know they told me a lot of
damned lies. And I've talked with a lot of fellows who've had the same
experience.... Anybody got a butt?"

Burbank, who was nearest to him, passed him a package of cigarettes.
Ferguson extracted one, lighted it, blew smoke at the ceiling, and then
quietly continued, drawling lazily: "Most fellows don't tell their folks
anything, and there's no reason why they should, either. Our folks lie
to us from the time we are babies. They lie to us about birth and God
and life. My folks never told me the truth about anything. When I came
to college I wasn't very innocent about women, but I was about
everything else. I believed that God made the world in six days the way
the Bible says, and that some day the world was coming to an end and
that we'd all be pulled up to heaven where Christ would give us the
once-over. Then he'd ship some of us to hell and give the good ones
harps. Well, since I've found out that all that's hooey I don't believe
in much of anything."

"I suppose you are talking about evolution," said Ross. "Well, Prof
Humbert says that evolutions hasn't anything to do with the Bible--He
says that science is science and that religion is religion and that the
two don't mix. He says that he holds by evolution but that that doesn't
make Christ's philosophy bad."

"No," Burbank agreed, "it doesn't make it bad; but that isn't the point.
I've read the Bible, which I bet is more than the rest of you can say,
and I've read the Sermon on the Mount a dozen times. It's darn good
sense, but what good does it do? The world will never practice Christ's
philosophy. The Bible says, 'Man is born to trouble as the sparks fly
upward,' and, believe me, that's damn true. If people would be pure and
good, then Christ's philosophy would work, but they aren't pure and
good; they aren't made pure and good, they're made selfish, and bad:
they're made, mind you, made full of evil and lust. I tell you it's all
wrong. I've been reading and reading, and the more I read the more I'm
convinced that we're all rotten--and that if there is a god he made us
rotten."

"You're wrong!" They all turned toward Winsor, who was still standing by
the fireplace; even Ferguson rolled over and looked at the excited boy.
"You're wrong," he repeated, "all wrong. I admit all that's been said
about parents. They do cheat us just as Don said. I never tell my folks
anything that really matters, and I don't know any other fellows that
do, either. I suppose there are some, but I don't know them. And I admit
that there is sin and vice, but I don't admit that Christ's philosophy
is useless. I've read the Sermon on the Mount, too. That's about all of
the Bible that I have read, but I've read that; and I tell you you're
all wrong. There is enough good in man to make that philosophy
practical. Why, there is more kindness and goodness around than we know
about. We see the evil, and we know we have lusts and--and things, but
we do good, too. And Hugh was right when he talked a while ago about the
beauty in the world. There's lots of it, lots and lots of it. There's
beautiful poetry and beautiful music and beautiful scenery; and there
are people who appreciate all of it. I tell you that in spite of
everything life is worth living. And I believe in Christ's philosophy,
too. I don't know whether He is the son of God or not--I think that He
must be--but that doesn't make any difference. Look at the wonderful
influence He has had."

"Rot," said Burbank calmly, "absolute rot. There has never been a good
deed done in His name; just the Inquisition and the what-do-you-call-'ems
in Russia. Oh, yes, pogroms--and wars and robbing people. Christianity
is just a name; there isn't any such thing. And most of the professional
Christians that I've seen are damn fools. I tell you, George, it's all
wrong. We're all in the dark, and I don't believe the profs know any more
about it than we do."

"Oh, yes, they do," Hugh exclaimed; "they must. Think of all the
studying they've done."

"Bah." Burbank was contemptuous. "They've read a lot of books, that's
all. Most of them never had an idea in their lives. Oh, I know that
some of them think; if they didn't, I'd leave college to-morrow. It's
men like Davis and Maxwell and Henley and Jimpson who keep me here. But
most of the profs can't do anything more than spout a few facts that
they've got out of books. No, they don't know any more about it than we
do. We don't know why we're here or where we're going or what we ought
to do while we are here. And we get into groups and tell smutty stories
and talk about women and religion, and we don't know any more than when
we started. Think of all the talk that goes on around this college about
sex. There's no end to it. Some of the fellows say positively there's no
sense in staying straight; and a few, damn few, admit that they think a
fellow ought to leave women alone, but most of them are in a muddle."

He rose and stretched. "I've got to be going--philosophy quiz
to-morrow." He smiled. "I don't agree with Nutter, and I don't agree
with George, and I don't agree with you, Don; and the worst of it is
that I don't agree with myself. You fellows can bull about this some
more if you want to; I've got to study."

"No, they can't," said Ross. "Not here, anyway. I've got to study, too.
The whole of you'll have to get out."

The boys rose and stretched. Ferguson rolled lazily off the couch.
"Well," he said with a yawn, "this has been very edifying. I've heard
it all before in a hundred bull sessions, and I suppose I'll hear it all
again. I don't know why I've hung around. There's a little dame that
I've got to write a letter to, and, believe me, she's a damn sight more
interesting than all your bull." He strolled out of the door, drawling a
slow "good night" over his shoulder.

Hugh went to his room and thought over the talk. He was miserably
confused. Like Ferguson he had believed everything that his father and
mother--and the minister--had told him, and he found himself beginning
to discard their ideas. There didn't seem to be any ideas to put in the
place of those he discarded. Until Carl's recent confidence he had
believed firmly in chastity, but he discovered, once the first shock had
worn off, that he liked Carl the unchaste just as much as he had Carl
the chaste. Carl seemed neither better nor worse for his experience.

He was lashed by desire; he was burning with curiosity--and yet, and yet
something held him back. Something--he hardly knew what it was--made him
avoid any woman who had a reputation for moral laxity. He shrank from
such a woman--and desired her so intensely that he was ashamed.

Life was suddenly becoming very complicated, more complicated, it
seemed, every day. With other undergraduates he discussed women and
religion endlessly, but he never reached any satisfactory conclusions.
He wished that he knew some professor that he could talk to. Surely some
of them must know the answers to his riddles....




CHAPTER XVI


Hugh wasn't troubled only by religion and sex; the whole college was
disturbing his peace of mind: all of his illusions were being ruthlessly
shattered. He had supposed that all professors were wise men, that their
knowledge was almost limitless, and he was finding that many of the
undergraduates were frankly contemptuous of the majority of their
teachers and that he himself was finding inspiration from only a few of
them. He went to his classes because he felt that he had to, but in most
of them he was confused or bored. He learned more in the bull sessions
than he did in the class-room, and men like Ross and Burbank were
teaching him more than his instructors.

Further, Nu Delta was proving a keen disappointment. More and more he
found himself thinking of Malcolm Graham's talk to him during the
rushing season of his freshman year. He often wished that Graham were
still in college so that he could go to him for advice. The fraternity
was not the brotherhood that he had dreamed about; it was composed of
several cliques warring with each other, never coalescing into a single
group except to contest the control of a student activity with some
other fraternity. There were a few "brothers" that Hugh liked, but most
of them were not his kind at all. Many of them were athletes taken into
the fraternity because they were athletes and for no other reason, and
although Hugh liked two of the athletes--they were really splendid
fellows--he was forced to admit that three of them were hardly better
than thugs, cheap muckers with fine bodies. Then there were the snobs,
usually prep school men with more money than they could handle wisely,
utterly contemptuous of any man not belonging to a fraternity or of one
belonging to any of the lesser fraternities. These were the "smooth
boys," interested primarily in clothes and "parties," passing their
courses by the aid of tutors or fraternity brothers who happened to
study.

Hugh felt that he ought to like all of his fraternity brothers, but, try
as he would, he disliked the majority of them. Early in his sophomore
year he knew that he ought to have "gone" Delta Sigma Delta, that that
fraternity contained a group of men whom he liked and respected, most of
them, at least. They weren't prominent in student activities, but they
were earnest lads as a whole, trying hard to get something out of
college.

The Nu Delta meetings every Monday night were a revelation to him. The
brothers were openly bored; they paid little or no attention to the
business before them. The president was constantly calling for order
and not getting it. During the rushing season in the second term,
interest picked up. Freshmen were being discussed. Four questions were
inevitably asked. Did the freshman have money? Was he an athlete? Had he
gone to a prep school? What was his family like?

Hugh had been very much attracted by a lad named Parker. He was a
charming youngster with a good mind and beautiful manners. In general,
only bad manners were _au fait_ at Sanford; so Parker was naturally
conspicuous. Hugh proposed his name for membership to Nu Delta.

"He's a harp," said a brother scornfully. "At any rate, he's a
Catholic."

That settled that. Only Protestants were eligible to Nu Delta at
Sanford, although the fraternity had no national rule prohibiting
members of other religions.

The snobbery of the fraternity cut Hugh deeply. He was a friendly lad
who had never been taught prejudice. He even made friends with a Jewish
youth and was severely censured by three fraternity brothers for that
friendship. He was especially taken to task by Bob Tucker, the
president.

"Look here, Hugh," Tucker said sternly, "you've got to draw the line
somewhere. I suppose Einstein is a good fellow and all that, but you've
been running around with him a lot. You've even brought him here
several times. Of course, you can have anybody in your room you want,
but we don't want any Jews around the house. I don't see why you had to
pick him up, anyway. There's plenty of Christians in college."

"He's a first-class fellow," Hugh replied stubbornly, "and I like him. I
don't see why we have to be so high-hat about Jews and Catholics. Most
of the fraternities take in Catholics, and the Phi Thetas take in Jews;
at least, they've got two. They bid Einstein, but he turned them down;
his folks don't want him to join a fraternity. And Chubby Elson told me
that the Theta Kappas wanted him awfully, but they have a local rule
against Jews."

"That doesn't make any difference," Tucker said sharply. "We don't want
him around here. Because some of the fraternities are so damn
broad-minded isn't any reason that we ought to be. I don't see that
their broad-mindedness is getting them anything. We rate about ten times
as much as the Phi Thetas or the Theta Kappas, and the reason we do is
that we are so much more exclusive."

Hugh wanted to mention the three Nu Delta thugs, but he wisely
restrained himself. "All right," he said stubbornly, "I won't bring
Einstein around here again, and I won't bring Parker either. But I'll
see just as much of them as I want to. My friends are my friends, and
if the fraternity doesn't like them, it can leave them alone. I pledged
loyalty to the fraternity, but I'll be damned if I pledged my life to
it." He got up and started for the door, his blue eyes dark with anger.
"I hate snobs," he said viciously, and departed.

After rushing season was over, he rarely entered that fraternity house,
chumming mostly with Carl, but finding friends in other fraternities or
among non-fraternity men. He was depressed and gloomy, although his
grades for the first term had been respectable. Nothing seemed very much
worth while, not even making his letter on the track. He was gradually
taking to cigarettes, and he had even had a nip or two out of a flask
that Carl had brought to the room. He had read the "Rubaiyat," and it
made a great impression on him. He and Carl often discussed the poem,
and more and more Hugh was beginning to believe in Omar's philosophy. At
least, he couldn't answer the arguments presented in Fitzgerald's
beautiful quatrains. The poem both depressed and thrilled him. After
reading it, he felt desperate--and ready for anything, convinced that
the only wise course was to take the cash and let the credit go. He was
much too young to hear the rumble of the distant drum. Sometimes he was
sure that there wasn't a drum, anyway.

He was particularly blue one afternoon when Carl rushed into the room
and urged him to go to Hastings, a town five miles from Haydensville.

"Jim Pearson's outside with his car," Carl said excitedly, "and he'll
take us down. He's got to come right back--he's only going for some
booze--but we needn't come back if we don't want to. We'll have a drink
and give Hastings the once-over. How's to come along?"

"All right," Hugh agreed indifferently and began to pull on his baa-baa
coat. "I'm with you. A shot of gin might jazz me up a little."

Once in Hastings, Pearson drove to a private residence at the edge of
the town. The boys got out of the car and filed around to the back door,
which was opened to their knock by a young man with a hatchet face and
hard blue eyes.

"Hello, Mr. Pearson," he said with an effort to be pleasant. "Want some
gin?"

"Yes, and some Scotch, too, Pete--if you have it. I'll take two quarts
of Scotch and one of gin."

"All right." Pete led the way down into the cellar, switching on an
electric light when he reached the foot of the stairs. There was a small
bar in the rear of the dingy, underground room, a table or two, and
dozens of small boxes stacked against the wall.

It was Hugh's first visit to a bootlegger's den, and he was keenly
interested. He had a high-ball along with Carl and Pearson; then took
another when Carl offered to stand treat. Pearson bought his three
quarts of liquor, paid Pete, and departed alone, Carl and Hugh having
decided to have another drink or two before they returned to
Haydensville. After a second high-ball Hugh did not care how many he
drank and was rather peevish when Carl insisted that he stop with a
third. Pete charged them eight dollars for their drinks, which they
cheerfully paid, and then warily climbed the stairs and stumbled out
into the cold winter air.

"Brr," said Carl, buttoning his coat up to his chin; "it's cold as
hell."

"So 'tis," Hugh agreed; "so 'tis. So 'tis. That's pretty. So 'tis, so
'tis, so 'tis. Isn't that pretty, Carl?"

"Awful pretty. Say it again."

"So 'tis. So 'tish. So--so--so. What wush it, Carl?"

"So 'tis."

"Oh, yes. So 'tish."

They walked slowly, arm in arm, toward the business section of Hastings,
pausing now and then to laugh joyously over something that appealed to
them as inordinately funny. Once it was a tree, another time a farmer in
a sleigh, and a third time a Ford. Hugh insisted, after laughing until
he wept, that the Ford was the "funniest goddamned thing" he'd ever
seen. Carl agreed with him.

They were both pretty thoroughly drunk by the time they reached the
center of the town, where they intended getting the bus back to
Haydensville. Two girls passed them and smiled invitingly.

"Oh, what peaches," Carl exclaimed.

"Jush--jush--Jush swell," Hugh said with great positiveness, hanging on
to Carl's arm. "They're the shwellest Janes I've ever sheen."

The girls, who were a few feet ahead, turned and smiled again.

"Let's pick them up," Carl whispered loudly.

"Shure," and Hugh started unsteadily to increase his pace.

The girls were professional prostitutes who visited Hastings twice a
year "to get the Sanford trade." They were crude specimens, revealing
their profession to the most casual observer. If Hugh had been sober
they would have sickened him, but he wasn't sober; he was joyously drunk
and the girls looked very desirable.

"Hello, girls," Carl said expansively, taking hold of one girl's arm.
"Busy?"

"Bish-bishy?" Hugh repeated valiantly.

The older "girl" smiled, revealing five gold teeth.

"Of course not," she replied in a hard, flat voice. "Not too busy for
you boys, anyway. Come along with us and we'll make this a big
afternoon."

"Sure," Carl agreed.

"Sh-shure," Hugh stuttered. He reached forward to take the arm of the
girl who had spoken, but at the same instant some one caught him by the
wrist and held him still.

Harry Slade, the star football player and this year's captain, happened
to be in Hastings; he was, in fact, seeking these very girls. He had
intended to pass on when he saw two men with them, but as soon as he
recognized Hugh he paused and then impulsively strode forward.

"Here, Carver," he said sharply. "What are you doing?"

"None--none of you da-damn business," Hugh replied angrily, trying to
shake his wrist free. "Leggo of me or--or I'll--I'll--"

"You won't do anything," 'Slade interrupted. "You're going home with
me."

"Who in hell are you?" one of the girls asked viciously. "Mind your own
damn business."

"You mind yours, sister, or you'll get into a peck of trouble. This
kid's going with me--and don't forget that. Come on, Carver."

Hugh was still vainly trying to twist his wrist free and was muttering,
"Leggo, leggo o' me."

Slade jerked him across the sidewalk. Carl followed expostulating. "Get
the hell out of here, Peters," Slade said angrily, "or I'll knock your
fool block off. You chase off with those rats if you want to, but you
leave Carver with me if you know what's good for you." He shoved Carl
away, and Carl was sober enough to know that Slade meant what he said.
Each girl took him by an arm, and he walked off down the street between
them, almost instantly forgetting Hugh.

Fortunately the street was nearly deserted, and no one had witnessed the
little drama. Hugh began to sob drunkenly. Slade grasped his shoulders
and shook him until his head waggled. "Now, shut up!" Slade commanded
sharply. He took Hugh by the arm and started down the street with him,
Hugh still muttering, "Leggo, leggo o' me."

Slade walked him the whole five miles back to Haydensville, and before
they were half way home Hugh's head began to clear. For a time he felt a
little sick, but the nausea passed, and when they reached the campus he
was quite sober. Not a word was spoken until Hugh unlocked the door of
Surrey 19. Then Slade said: "Go wash your face and head in cold water.
Souse yourself good and then come back; I want to have a talk with you."

Hugh obeyed orders, but with poor grace. He was angry and confused,
angry because his liberty had been interfered with, and confused because
Slade had never paid more than passing attention to him--and for a year
and a half Slade had been his god.

Slade was one of those superb natural athletes who make history for many
colleges. He was big, powerfully built, and moved as easily as a
dancer. His features were good enough, but his brown eyes were dull and
his jaw heavy rather than strong. Hugh had often heard that Slade
dissipated violently, but he did not believe the rumors; he was positive
that Slade could not be the athlete he was if he dissipated. He had been
thrilled every time Slade had spoken to him--the big man of the college,
the one Sanford man who had ever made All American, as Slade had this
year.

When he returned to his room from the bath-room, Slade was sitting in a
big chair smoking a cigarette. Hugh walked into his bedroom, combed his
dripping hair, and then came into the study, still angry but feeling a
little sheepish and very curious.

"Well, what is it?" he demanded, sitting down.

"Do you know who those women were?"

"No. Who are they?"

"They're Bessie Haines and Emma Gleeson; at least, that's what they call
themselves, and they're rotten bags."

Hugh had a little quiver of fright, but he felt that he ought to defend
himself.

"Well, what of it?" he asked sullenly. "I don't see as you had any right
to pull me away. You never paid any attention before to me. Why this
sudden interest? How come you're so anxious to guard my purity?"

Slade was embarrassed. He threw his cigarette into the fireplace and
immediately lighted another one. Then he looked at his shoes and
muttered, "I'm a pretty bad egg myself."

"So I've heard." Hugh was frankly sarcastic.

"Well, I am." Slade looked up defiantly. "I guess it's up to me to
explain--and I don't know how to do it. I'm a dumbbell. I can't talk
decently. I flunked English One three times, you know." He hesitated a
moment and then blurted out, "I was looking for those bags myself."

"What?" Hugh leaned forward and stared at him, bewildered and
dumfounded. "_You_ were looking for them?"

"Yeah... You see, I'm a bad egg--always been a bad one with women, ever
since I was a kid. Gotta have one about every so often.... I--I'm not
much."

"But what made you stop me?" Hugh pressed his hand to his temple. His
head was aching, and he could make nothing out of Slade's talk.

"Because--because.... Oh, hell, Carver, I don't know how to explain it.
I'm twenty-four and you're about nineteen and I know a lot that you
don't. I was brought up in South Boston and I ran with a gang. There
wasn't anything rotten that we didn't do.... I've been watching you.
You're different."

"How different?" Hugh demanded. "I want women just as much as you do."

"That isn't it." Slade ran his fingers through his thick black hair and
scowled fiercely at the fireplace. "That isn't it at all. You're--you're
awfully clean and decent. I've been watching you lots--oh, for a year.
You're--you're different," he finished lamely.

Hugh was beginning to understand. "Do you mean," he asked slowly, "that
you want me to keep straight--that--that, well--that you like me that
way better?" He was really asking Slade if he admired him, and Slade got
his meaning perfectly. To Hugh the idea was preposterous. Why, Slade had
made every society on the campus; he had been given every honor that the
students could heap on him--and he envied Hugh, an almost unknown
sophomore. Why, it was ridiculous.

"Yes, that's what I mean; that's what I was trying to get at." For a
minute Slade hesitated; he wasn't used to giving expression to his
confused emotions, and he didn't know how to go about it. "I'd--I'd like
to be like you; that's it. I--I didn't want you to be like me.... Those
women are awful bags. Anything might happen."

"Why didn't you stop Carl Peters, too, then?"

"Peters knows his way about. He can take care of himself. You're
different, though.... You've never been drunk before, have you?"

"No. No, I never have." Hugh's irritation was all gone. He was touched,
deeply touched, by Slade's clumsy admiration, and he felt weak,
emotionally exhausted after his little spree. "It's awfully good of you
to--to think of me that way. I'm--I'm glad you stopped me."

Slade stood up. He felt that he had better be going. He couldn't tell
Hugh how much he liked and admired him, how much he envied him. He was
altogether sentimental about the boy, entirely devoted to him. He had
wanted to talk to Hugh more than Hugh had wanted to talk to him, but he
had never felt that he had anything to offer that could possibly
interest Hugh. It was a strange situation; the hero had put the hero
worshiper on a high, white marble pedestal.

He moved toward the door. "So long," he said as casually as he could.

Hugh jumped up and rushed to him. "I'm awfully grateful to you, Harry,"
he said impulsively. "It was damn white of you. I--I don't know how to
thank you." He held out his hand.

Slade gripped it for a moment, and then, muttering another "So long,"
passed out of the door.

Hugh was more confused than ever and grew steadily more confused as the
days passed. He couldn't understand why Slade, frankly unchaste himself,
should consider his chastity so important. He was genuinely glad that
Slade had rescued him, genuinely grateful, but his confusion about all
things sexual was more confounded. The strangest thing was that when he
told Carl about Slade's talk, Carl seemed to understand perfectly,
though he never offered a satisfactory explanation.

"I know how he feels," Carl said, "and I'm awfully glad he butted in and
pulled you away. I'd hate to see you messing around with bags like that
myself, and if I hadn't been drunk I wouldn't have let you. I'm more
grateful to him than you are. Gee! I'd never have forgiven myself," he
concluded fervently.

       *       *       *       *       *

Just when the Incident was beginning to occupy less of Hugh's thoughts,
it was suddenly brought back with a crash. He came home from the
gymnasium one afternoon to find Carl seated at his desk writing. He
looked up when Hugh came in, tore the paper into fragments, and tossed
them info the waste-basket.

"Guess I'd better tell you," he said briefly. "I was just writing a note
to you."

"To me? Why?"

Carl pointed to his suit-case standing by the center-table.

"That's why."

"Going away on a party?"

"My trunk left an hour ago. I'm going away for good." Carl's voice was
husky, and he spoke with an obvious effort.

Hugh walked quickly to the desk. "Why, old man, what's the matter?
Anything wrong with your mother? You're not sick, are you?"

Carl laughed, briefly, bitterly. "Yes, I'm sick all right. I'm sick."

Hugh, worried, looked at him seriously. "Why, what's the matter? I
didn't know that you weren't feeling well."

Carl looked at the rug and muttered, "You remember those rats we picked
up in Hastings?"

"Yes?"

"Well, I know of seven fellows they've sent home."

"What!" Hugh cried, his eyes wide with horror. "You don't mean that
you--that you--"

"I mean exactly that," Carl replied in a low, flat voice. He rose and
moved to the other side of the room. "I mean exactly that; and Doc
Conners agrees with me," he added sarcastically. Then more softly, "He's
got to tell the dean. That's why I'm going home."

Hugh was swept simultaneously by revulsion and sympathy. "God, I'm
sorry," he exclaimed. "Oh, Carl, I'm so damn sorry."

Carl was standing by Hugh's desk, his hands clenched, his lips
compressed. "Keep my junk," he said unevenly, "and sell anything you
want to if you live in the house next year."

"But you'll be back?"

"No, I won't come back--I won't come back." He was having a hard time
to keep back the tears and bit his trembling lip mercilessly. "Oh,
Hugh," he suddenly cried, "what will my mother say?"

Hugh was deeply distressed, but he was startled by that "my mother." It
was the first time he had ever heard Carl speak of his mother except as
the "old lady."

"She will understand," he said soothingly.

"How can she? How can she? God, Hugh, God!" He buried his face in his
hands and wept bitterly. Hugh put his arm around his shoulder and tried
to comfort him, and in a few minutes Carl was in control of himself
again. He dried his eyes with his handkerchief.

"What a fish I am!" he said, trying to grin. "A goddamn fish." He looked
at his watch. "Hell, I've got to be going if I'm going to make the five
fifteen," He picked up his suit-case and held out his free hand.
"There's something I want to say to you, Hugh, but I guess I'll write
it. Please don't come to the train with me." He gripped Hugh's hand hard
for an instant and then was out of the door and down the hall before
Hugh had time to say anything.

Two days afterward the letter came. The customary "Dear brother" and
"Fraternally yours" were omitted.


       Dear Hugh:

       I've thought of letters yards long but I'm not going to
       write them. I just want to say that you are the finest
       thing that ever happened to me outside of my mother, and
       I respect you more than any fellow I've ever known. I'm
       ashamed because I started you drinking and I hope you'll
       stop it. I feel toward you the way Harry Slade does,
       only more I guess. You've done an awful lot for me.

       I want to ask a favor of you. Please leave women alone.
       Keep straight, please. You don't know how much I want
       you to do that.

       Thanks for all you've done for me.

                                                CARL.


Hugh's eyes filled with tears when he read that letter. Carl seemed a
tragic figure to him, and he missed him dreadfully. Poor old Carl! What
hell it must have been to tell his mother! "And he wants me to keep
straight. By God, I will.... I'll try to, anyhow."




CHAPTER XVII


Hugh's depression was not continuous by any means. He was much too young
and too healthy not to find life an enjoyable experience most of the
time. Disillusionment followed disillusionment, each one painful and
dispiriting in itself, but they came at long enough intervals for him to
find a great deal of pleasure in between.

Also, for the first time since he had been transferred from Alling's
section in Latin, he was taking genuine interest in a course. Having
decided to major in English, he found that he was required to take a
composition course the second half of his sophomore year. His instructor
was Professor Henley, known as Jimmie Henley among the students, a man
in his middle thirties, spare, neat in his dress, sharp with his tongue,
apt to say what he thought in terms so plain that not even the stupidest
undergraduate could fail to understand him. His hazel-brown eyes were
capable of a friendly twinkle, but they had a way of darkening suddenly
and snapping that kept his students constantly on the alert. There was
little of the professor about him but a great deal of the teacher.

Hugh went to his first conference with him not entirely easy in his
mind. Henley had a reputation for "tearing themes to pieces and making a
fellow feel like a poor fish." Hugh had written his themes hastily, as
he had during his freshman year, and he was afraid that Henley might
discover evidences of that haste.

Henley was leaning back in his swivel chair, his feet on the desk, a
brier pipe in his mouth, as Hugh entered the cubbyhole of an office.
Down came the feet with a bang.

"Hello, Carver," Henley said cheerfully. "Come in and sit down while I
go through your themes." He motioned to a chair by the desk. Hugh
muttered a shy "hello" and sat down, watching Henley expectantly and
rather uncomfortably.

Henley picked up three themes. Then he turned his keen eyes on Hugh.
"I've already read these. Lazy cuss, aren't you?" he asked amiably.

Hugh flushed. "I--I suppose so."

"You know that you are; no supposing to it." He slapped the desk lightly
with the themes. "First drafts, aren't they?"

"Yes, sir." Hugh felt his cheeks getting warmer.

Henley smiled. "Thanks for not lying. If you had lied, this conference
would have ended right now. Oh, I wouldn't have told you that I thought
you were lying; I would simply have made a few polite but entirely
insincere comments about your work and let you go. Now I am going to
talk to you frankly and honestly."

"I wish you would," Hugh murmured, but he wasn't at all sure that he
wished anything of the sort.

Henley knocked the ashes out of his pipe into a metal tray, refilled it,
lighted it, and then puffed meditatively, gazing at Hugh with kind but
speculative eyes.

"I think you have ability," he began slowly. "You evidently write with
great fluency and considerable accuracy, and I can find poetic touches
here and there that please me. But you are careless, abominably
careless, lazy. Whatever virtues there are in your themes come from a
natural gift, not from any effort you made to say the thing in the best
way. Now, I'm not going to spend anytime discussing these themes in
detail; they aren't worth it."

He pointed his pipe at Hugh. "The point is exactly this," he said
sternly. "I'll never spend any time discussing your themes so long as
you turn in hasty, shoddy work. I can see right now that you can get a C
in this course without trying. If that's all you want, all right, I'll
give it to you--and let it go at that. The Lord knows that I have enough
to do without wasting time on lazy youngsters who haven't sense enough
to develop their gifts. If you continue to turn in themes like these,
I'll give you C's or D's on them and let you dig your own shallow grave
by yourself. But If you want to try to write as well as you can, I'll
give you all the help in my power. Not one minute can you have so long
as you don't try, but you can have hours if you do try. Furthermore, you
will find writing a pleasure if you write as well as you can, but you
won't get any sport just scribbling off themes because you have to."

He paused to toss the three themes across the desk to Hugh, who was
watching him with astonishment. No instructor had ever talked to him
that way before.

"You can rewrite these themes if you want to," Henley went on. "I
haven't graded them, and I'll reserve the grades for the rewritten
themes; and if I find that you have made a real effort, I'll discuss
them in detail with you. What do you say?"

"I'd like to rewrite them," Hugh said softly. "I know they are rotten."

"No, they aren't rotten. I've got dozens that are worse. That isn't the
point. They aren't nearly so good as you can make them, and only your
best work is acceptable to me. Now show me what you can do with them,
and then we'll tear them to shreds in regular fashion." He turned to his
desk and smiled at Hugh, who, understanding that the conference was
over, stood up and reached for the themes. "I'll be interested in
seeing what you can do with those," Henley concluded. "Every one of them
has a good idea. Go to it--and get them back in a week."

"Yes, sir. Thanks very much."

"Right-o. Good-by."

"Good-by, sir," and Hugh left the office determined to rewrite those
themes so that "they'd knock Jimmie Henley's eye out." They didn't do
exactly that, but they did interest him, and he spent an hour and a half
discussing them with Hugh.

That was merely the first of a series of long conferences. Sometimes
Henley and Hugh discussed writing, but often they talked about other
subjects, not as instructor and student but as two men who respected
each other's mind. Before the term was out Henley had invited Hugh to
his home for dinner and to meet Mrs. Henley. Hugh was enormously
flattered and, for some reason, stimulated to do better work. He found
his talks with Henley really exciting, and he expressed his opinions to
him as freely and almost as positively as he did to his classmates. He
told his friends that Jimmie Henley was human, not like most profs. And
he worked at his writing as he had never worked at anything, running
excepted, since he had been in college.

The students never knew what to expect from Henley in the class-room.
Sometimes he read themes and criticized them; sometimes he discussed
books that he had been reading; sometimes he read poetry, not because
contemporary poetry was part of the course but because he happened to
feel like reading it that morning; sometimes he discoursed on the art of
writing; and sometimes he talked about anything that happened to be
occupying his mind. He made his class-room an open forum, and the
students felt free to interrupt him at any time and to disagree with
him. Usually they did disagree with him and afterward wrote violent
themes to prove that he was wrong. That was exactly what Henley wanted
them to do, and the more he could stir them up the better satisfied he
was.

One morning, however, he talked without interruption. He didn't want to
be interrupted, and the boys were so taken back by his statements that
they could find no words to say anything.

The bell rang. Henley called the roll, stuck his class-book into his
coat pocket, placed his watch on the desk; then leaned back and looked
the class over.

"Your themes are making me sick," he began, "nauseated. I have a fairly
strong stomach, but there is just so much that I can stand--and you have
passed the limit. There is hardly a man in this class who hasn't written
at least one theme on the glory that is Sanford. As you know, I am a
Sanford man myself, and I have my share of affection for the college,
but you have reached an ecstasy of chauvinism that makes Chauvin's
affection for Napoleon seem almost like contempt.

"In the last batch of themes I got five telling me of the perfection of
Sanford: Sanford is the greatest college in the country; Sanford has the
best athletes, the finest equipment, the most erudite faculty, the most
perfect location, the most loyal alumni, the strongest spirit--the most
superlative everything. Nonsense! Rot! Bunk! Sanford hasn't anything of
the sort, and I who love it say so. Sanford is a good little college,
but it isn't a Harvard, a Yale, or a Princeton, or, for that matter, a
Dartmouth or Brown; and those colleges still have perfection ahead of
them. Sanford has made a place for itself in the sun, but it will never
find a bigger place so long as its sons do nothing but chant its praises
and condemn any one as disloyal who happens to mention its very numerous
faults.

"Well, I'm going to mention some of those faults, not all of them by any
means, just those that any intelligent undergraduate ought to be able to
see for himself.

"In the first place, this is supposed to be an educational institution;
it is endowed for that purpose and it advertises itself as such. And you
men say that you come here to get an education. But what do you really
do? You resist education with all your might and main, digging your
heels into the gravel of your own ignorance and fighting any attempt to
teach you anything every inch of the way. What's worse, you aren't
content with your own ignorance; you insist that every one else be
ignorant, too. Suppose a man attempts to acquire culture, as some of
them do. What happens? He is branded as wet. He is a social leper.

"Wet! What currency that bit of slang has--and what awful power. It took
me a long time to find out what the word meant, but after long research
I think that I know. A man is wet if he isn't a 'regular guy'; he is wet
if he isn't 'smooth'; he is wet if he has intellectual interests and
lets the mob discover them; and, strangely enough, he is wet by the same
token if he is utterly stupid. He is wet if he doesn't show at least a
tendency to dissipate, but he isn't wet if he dissipates to excess. A
man will be branded as wet for any of these reasons, and once he is so
branded, he might as well leave college; if he doesn't, he will have a
lonely and hard row to hoe. It is a rare undergraduate who can stand the
open contempt of his fellows."

He paused, obviously ordering his thoughts before continuing. The boys
waited expectantly. Some of them were angry, some amused, a few in
agreement, and all of them intensely interested.

Henley leaned back in his chair. "What horrible little conformers you
are," he began sarcastically, "and how you loathe any one who doesn't
conform! You dress both your bodies and your minds to some set model.
Just at present you are making your hair foul with some sort of perfumed
axle-grease; nine tenths of you part it in the middle. It makes no
difference whether the style is becoming to you or not; you slick it
down and part it in the middle. Last year nobody did it; the chances are
that next year nobody will do it, but anybody who doesn't do it right
now is in danger of being called wet."

Hugh had a moment of satisfaction. He did not pomade his hair, and he
parted it on the side as he had when he came to college. True, he had
tried the new fashion, but after scanning himself carefully in the
mirror, he decided that he looked like a "blond wop"--and washed his
hair. He was guilty, however, of the next crime mentioned.

"The same thing is true of clothes," Henley was saying. "Last year every
one wore four-button suits and very severe trousers. This year every one
is wearing Norfolk jackets and bell-bottomed trousers, absurd things
that flop around the shoes, and some of them all but trail on the
ground. Now, any one who can't afford the latest creation or who
declines to wear it is promptly called wet.

"And, as I said before, you insist on the same standardization of your
minds. Just now it is not _au fait_ to like poetry; a man who does is
exceedingly wet, indeed; he is effeminate, a sissy. As a matter of
fact, most of you like poetry very much. You never give me such good
attention as when I read poetry. What's more, some of you are writing
the disgraceful stuff. But what happens when a man does submit a poem as
a theme? He writes at the bottom of the page, 'Please do not read this
in class.' Some of you write that because you don't think that the poem
is very good, but most of you are afraid of the contempt of your
classmates. I know of any number of men in this college who read vast
quantities of poetry, but always on the sly. Just think of that! Men pay
thousands of dollars and give four years of their lives supposedly to
acquire culture and then have to sneak off into a corner to read poetry.

"Who are your college gods? The brilliant men who are thinking and
learning, the men with ideals and aspirations? Not by a long shot. They
are the athletes. Some of the athletes happen to be as intelligent and
as eager to learn as anybody else, but a fair number are here simply
because they are paid to come to play football or baseball or what not.
And they are worshiped, bowed down to, cheered, and adored. The
brilliant men, unless they happen to be very 'smooth' in the bargain,
are considered wet and are ostracized.

"Such is the college that you write themes about to tell me that it is
perfect. The college is made up of men who worship mediocrity; that is
their ideal except in athletics. The condition of the football field is
a thousand times more important to the undergraduates and the alumni
than the number of books in the library or the quality of the faculty.
The fraternities will fight each other to pledge an athlete, but I have
yet to see them raise any dust over a man who was merely intelligent.

"I tell you that you have false standards, false ideals, and that you
have a false loyalty to the college. The college can stand criticism; it
will thrive and grow on it--but it won't grow on blind adoration. I tell
you further that you are as standardized as Fords and about as
ornamental. Fords are useful for ordinary work; so are you--and unless
some of you wake up and, as you would say, 'get hep to yourselves,' you
are never going to be anything more than human Fords.

"You pride yourselves on being the cream of the earth, the noblest work
of God. You are told so constantly. You are the intellectual aristocracy
of America, the men who are going to lead the masses to a brighter and
broader vision of life. Merciful heavens preserve us! You swagger around
utterly contemptuous of the man who hasn't gone to college. You talk
magnificently about democracy, but you scorn the non-college man--and
you try pathetically to imitate Yale and Princeton. And I suppose Yale
and Princeton are trying to imitate Fifth Avenue and Newport. Democracy!
Rot! This college isn't democratic. Certain fraternities condescend to
other fraternities, and those fraternities barely deign even to
condescend to the non-fraternity men. You say hello to everybody on the
campus and think that you are democratic. Don't fool yourselves, and
don't try to fool me. If you want to write some themes about Sanford
that have some sense and truth in them, some honest observation, go
ahead; but don't pass in any more chauvinistic bunk. I'm sick of it."

He put his watch in his pocket and stood up. "You may belong to the
intellectual aristocracy of the country, but I doubt it; you may lead
the masses to a 'bigger and better' life, but I doubt it; you may be the
cream of the earth, but I doubt it. All I've got to say is this: if
you're the cream of the earth, God help the skimmed milk." He stepped
down from the rostrum and briskly left the room.

For an instant the boys sat silent, and then suddenly there was a rustle
of excitement. Some of them laughed, some of them swore softly, and most
of them began to talk. They pulled on their baa-baa coats and left the
room chattering.

"He certainly has the dope," said Pudge Jamieson. "We're a lot of
low-brows pretending to be intellectual high-hats. We're intellectual
hypocrites; that's what we are."

"How do you get that way?" Ferdy Hillman, who was walking with Hugh and
Pudge, demanded angrily. "We may not be so hot, but we're a damn sight
better than these guys that work in offices and mills. Jimmie Henley
gives me a pain. He shoots off his gab as if he knew everything. He's
got to show me where other colleges have anything on Sanford. He's a
hell of a Sanford man, he is."

They were walking slowly down the stairs. George Winsor caught up with
them.

"What did you think of it, George?" Hugh asked.

Winsor grinned. "He gave me some awful body blows," he said, chuckling.
"Cripes, I felt most of the time that he was talking only to me. I'm
sore all over. What did you think of it? Jimmie's a live wire, all
right."

"I don't know what to think," Hugh replied soberly. "He's knocked all
the props from under me. I've got to think it over."

He did think it over, and the more he thought the more he was inclined
to believe that Henley was right. Boy-like, he carried Henley's
statements to their final conclusion and decided that the college was a
colossal failure. He wrote a theme and said so.

"You're wrong, Hugh," Henley said when he read the theme. "Sanford has
real virtues, a bushel of them. You'll discover them all right before
you graduate."




CHAPTER XVIII


Sanford's virtues were hard for Hugh to find, and they grew more
inconspicuous as the term advanced. For the time being nothing seemed
worth while: he was disgusted with himself, the undergraduates, and the
fraternity; he felt that the college had bilked him. Often he thought of
the talk he had had with his father before he left for college.
Sometimes that talk seemed funny, entirely idiotic, but sometimes it
infuriated him. What right had his father to send him off to college
with such fool ideas in his head? Nu Delta, the perfect brotherhood!
Bull! How did his father get that way, anyhow? Hugh had yet to learn
that nearly every chapter changes character at least once a decade and
that Nu Delta thirty years earlier had been an entirely different
organization from what it was at present. At times he felt that his
father had deliberately deceived him, but in quieter moments he knew
better; then he realized that his father was a dreamer and an innocent,
a delicately minded man who had never really known anything about
Sanford College or the world either. Hugh often felt older and wiser
than his father; and in many ways he was.

In March he angered his fraternity brothers again by refusing a part in
the annual musical comedy, which was staged by the Dramatic Society
during Prom week. Hugh's tenor singing voice and rather small features
made him an excellent possibility for a woman's part. But he was not a
good actor, and he knew it. His attempts at acting in a high-school play
had resulted in a flat failure, and he had no intention of publicly
making a fool of himself again. Besides, he did not like the idea of
appearing on the stage as a girl; the mere idea was offensive to him.
Therefore, when the Society offered him a part he declined it.

Bob Tucker took him severely to task. "What do you mean, Hugh," he
demanded, "by turning down the Dramat? Here you've got a chance for a
lead, and you turn up your nose at it as if you were God Almighty. It
seems to me that you are getting gosh-awful high-hat lately. You run
around with a bunch of thoroughly wet ones; you never come to fraternity
meetings if you can help it; you aren't half training down at the track;
and now you give the Dramat the air just as if an activity or two wasn't
anything in your young life."

"The Dramat isn't anything to me," Hugh replied, trying to keep his
temper. Tucker's arrogance always made him angry. "I can't act worth a
damn. Never could. I tried once in a play at home and made a poor fish
of myself, and you can bet your bottom dollar that I'm not going to
again."

"Bunk!" Tucker ejaculated contemptuously. "Hooey! Anybody can act good
enough for the Dramat. I tell you right now that you're turning the
fraternity down; you're playing us dirt. What have you done in college?
Not a goddamn thing except make the Glee Club. I don't care about track.
I suppose you did your best last year, though I know damn well that you
aren't doing it this year. What would become of the fraternity if all of
us parked ourselves on our tails and gave the activities the air the way
you do? You're throwing us down, and we don't like it."

"Well, I'm not going out for the Dramat," Hugh mumbled sullenly; "you
can just bet on that. I'll admit that I haven't trained the way I ought
to, but I have made the Glee Club, and I have promised to join the Banjo
Club, and I am still on the track squad, and that's more than half the
fellows in this fraternity can say. Most of 'em don't do anything but go
on parties and raise hell generally. How come you're picking on me? Why
don't you ride some of them for a while? I don't see where they're so
hot."

"Never mind the other fellows." Tucker's black eyes flashed angrily. He
was one of the "hell-raisers" himself, good looking; always beautifully
dressed, and proud of the fact that he was "rated the smoothest man on
the campus." His "smoothness" had made him prominent in activities--that
and his estimate of himself. He took it for granted that he would be
prominent, and the students accepted him at his own valuation; and
powerful Nu Delta had been behind him, always able to swing Votes when
votes were needed.

"Never mind the other fellows," he repeated. "They're none of your
party. You've got talents, and you're not making use of them. You could
be as popular as the devil if you wanted to, but you go chasing around
with kikes and micks."

Hugh was very angry and a little absurd in his youthful pomposity. "I
suppose you refer to Parker and Einstein--my one mick friend, although
he isn't Irish, and my, one Jewish friend. Well, I shall stick to them
and see just as much of them as I like. I've told you that before, and
you might as well get me straight right now: I'm going to run with
whoever I want. The fraternity cannot dictate to me about my friends.
You told me you didn't want Parker and Einstein around the house. I
don't bring them around. I don't see as how you've got a right to ask
anything more."

"I don't suppose you realize that everything you do reflects on the
fraternity," Tucker retorted, slightly pompous himself.

"I suppose it does, but I can't see that I have done anything that is
going to ruin the name of Nu Delta. I don't get potted regularly or
chase around with filthy bags or flunk my courses or crib my way
through; and I could mention some men in this house who do all those
things." Hugh was thoroughly angry and no longer in possession of his
best judgment. "If you don't like the way I act, you can have my pin any
time you say." He stood up, his blue eyes almost black with rage, his
cheeks flushed, his mouth a thin white line.

Tucker realized that he had gone too far. "Oh, don't get sore, Hugh," he
said soothingly. "I didn't mean it the way you are taking it. Of course,
we don't want you to turn in your pin. We all like you. We just want you
to come around more and be one of the fellows, more of a regular guy. We
feel that you can bring a lot of honor to the fraternity if you want to,
and we've been kinda sore because you've been giving activities the
go-by."

"How about my studies?" Hugh retorted. "I suppose you want me to give
them the air. Well, I did the first term, and I made a record that I was
ashamed of. I promised my folks that I'd do better; and I'm going to. I
give an hour or two a day to track and several hours a week to the Glee
Club, and now I'm going to have to give several more to the Banjo Club.
That's all I can give at present, and that's all I'm going to give. I
know perfectly well that some fellows can go out for a bunch of
activities and make Phi Bete, too; but they're sharks and I'm not. Don't
worry, either; I won't disgrace the fraternity by making Phi Bete," he
concluded sarcastically.

"Oh, calm down, Hugh, and forget what I said," Tucker pleaded,
thoroughly sorry that he had started the argument. "You go ahead and do
what you think right and we'll stand by you." He stood up and put his
hand on Hugh's shoulder. "No hard feelings, are there, old man?"

Kindness always melted Hugh; no matter how angry he was, he could not
resist it. "No," he said softly; "no hard feelings. I'm sorry I lost my
temper."

Tucker patted his shoulder. "Oh, that's all right. I guess I kinda lost
mine, too. You'll be around to the meeting to-morrow night, won't you?
Better come. Paying fines don't get you anywhere."

"Sure, I'll come."

He went but took no part in the discussion, nor did he frequent the
fraternity house any more than he had previously. More and more he
realized that he had "gone with the wrong crowd," and more and more he
thought of what Graham had said to him in his freshman year about how a
man was in hell if he joined the wrong fraternity. "I was the wise
bird," he told himself caustically; "I was the guy who knew all about
it. Graham saw what would happen, and I didn't have sense enough to
take his advice. Hell, I never even thought about what he told me. I
knew that I would be in heaven if Nu Delta gave me a bid. Heaven! Well,
I'm glad that they were too high-hat for Norry Parker and that he went
with the right bunch."

Norville Parker was Hugh's Catholic friend, and the more he saw of the
freshman the better he liked him. Parker had received several bids from
fraternities, and he followed the advice Hugh had given him. "If Delta
Sigma Delta bids you, go there," Hugh had said positively. "They're the
bunch you belong with. Apparently the Kappa Zetes are going to bid you,
too. You go Delta Sig if you get the chance." Hugh envied Parker the
really beautiful fraternity life he was leading. "Why in God's name," he
demanded of himself regularly, "didn't I have sense enough to take
Graham's advice?"

When spring came, the two boys took long walks into the country, both of
them loving the new beauty of the spring and happy in perfect
companionship. Hugh missed Carl badly, and he wanted to ask Parker to
room with him the remainder of the term. He felt, however, that the
fraternity would object, and he wanted no further trouble with Nu Delta.
As a matter of fact, the fraternity would have said nothing, but Hugh
had become hypersensitive and expected his "brothers" to find fault
with his every move. He had no intention of deserting Parker, but he
could not help feeling that rooming with him would be a gratuitous
insult to the fraternity.

Parker--every one called him Norry--was a slender, delicate lad with
dreamy gray eyes and silky brown hair that, unless he brushed it back
severely, fell in soft curls on his extraordinarily white forehead.
Except for a slightly aquiline nose and a firm jaw, he was almost
effeminate in appearance, his mouth was so sensitive, his hands so white
and slender, his manner so gentle. He had a slow, winning smile, a
quiet, low voice. He was a dreamer and a mystic, a youth who could see
fairies dancing in the shadows; and he told Hugh what he saw.

"I see things," he said to Hugh one moonlight night as they strolled
through the woods; "I see things, lovely little creatures flitting
around among the trees: I mean I see them when I'm alone. I like to lie
on my back in the meadows and look at the clouds and imagine myself
sitting on a big fellow and sailing and sailing away to heaven. It's
wonderful. I feel that way when I play my fiddle." He played the violin
beautifully and had promptly been made soloist for the Musical Clubs.
"I--I can't explain. Sometimes when I finish playing, I find my eyes
full of tears. I feel as if I had been to some wonderful place, and I
don't want to come back."

"I guess I'm not like other fellows. I cry over poetry, not because it
makes me sad. It's not that. It's just so beautiful. Why, when I first
read Shelley's 'Cloud' I was almost sick I was so happy. I could hardly
stand it. And when I hear beautiful music I cry, too. Why, when I listen
to Kreisler, I sometimes want to beg him to stop; it hurts and makes me
so happy that--that I just can't stand it," he finished lamely.

"I know," Hugh said. "I know how it is. I feel that way sometimes, too,
but not as much as you, I guess. I don't cry. I never really cry, but I
want to once in a while. I--I write poetry sometimes," he confessed
awkwardly, "but I guess it's not very good. Jimmie Henley says it isn't
so bad for a sophomore, but I'm afraid that he's just stringing me
along, trying to encourage me, you know. But there are times when I've
said a little bit right, just a little bit, but I've known that it was
right--and then I feel the way you do."

"I've written lots of poetry," Norry said simply, "but it's no good;
it's never any good." He paused between two big trees and pointed
upward. "Look, look up there. See those black branches and that patch of
sky between them and those stars. I want to picture that--and I can't;
and I want to picture the trees the way they look now so fluffy with
tiny new leaves, but I miss it a million miles.... But I can get it in
music," he added more brightly. "Grieg says it. Music is the most
wonderful thing in the world. I wish I could be a great violinist. I
can't, though. I'm not a genius, and I'm not strong enough. I can't
practice very long."

They continued walking in silence for a few minutes, and then Norry
said: "I'm awfully happy here at college, and I didn't expect to be,
either. I knew that I was kinda different from other fellows, not so
strong; and I don't like ugly things or smutty stories or anything like
that. I think women are lovely, and I hate to hear fellows tell dirty
stories about them. I'm no fool, Hugh; I know about the things that
happen, but I don't want to hear about them. Things that are dirty and
ugly make me feel sick."

"Well, I was afraid the fellows would razz me. But they don't. They
don't at all. The fellows over at the Delta Sig house are wonderful to
me. They don't think I'm wet. They don't razz me for not going on wild
parties, though I know that some of the fellows are pretty gay
themselves. They ask me to fiddle for them nearly every evening, and
they sit and listen very, very quietly just as long as I'll play. I'm
glad you told me to go Delta Sig."

Norry made Hugh feel very old and a little crude and hard. He realized
that there was something rare, almost exquisite, about the boy, and that
he lived largely in a beautiful world of his own imagination. It would
have surprised Norry if any one had told him that his fraternity
brothers stood in awe of him, that they thought he was a genius. Some of
them were built out of pretty common clay, but they felt the almost
unearthly purity of the boy they had made a brother; and the hardest of
them, the crudest, silently elected himself the guardian of that purity.




CHAPTER XIX


Hugh found real happiness in Norry Parker's companionship, and such men
as Burbank and Winsor were giving him a more robust but no less pleasant
friendship. They were earnest youths, eager and alive, curious about the
world, reading, discussing all sorts of topics vigorously, and yet far
more of the earth earthy than Parker, who was so mystical and dreamy
that constant association with him would have been something of a
strain.

For a time life seemed to settle down into a pleasant groove of studies
that took not too much time, movies, concerts, an occasional play by the
Dramatic Society, perhaps a slumming party to a dance in Hastings
Saturday nights, bull sessions, long talks with Henley in his office or
at his home, running on the track, and some reading.

For a week or two life was lifted out of the groove by a professor's
daughter. Burbank introduced Hugh to her, and at first he was attracted
by her calm dignity. He called three times and then gave her up in
despair. Her dignity hid an utterly blank mind. She was as uninteresting
as her father, and he had the reputation, well deserved, of being the
dullest lecturer on the campus.

Only one event disturbed the pleasant calm of Hugh's life after his
argument with Tucker. He did not attend Prom because he knew no girl
whom he cared to ask; he failed again to make his letter and took his
failure philosophically; and he received a note from Janet Harton
telling him that she was engaged to "the most wonderful man in the
world"--and he didn't give a hoot if she was.

Just after Easter vacation the Nu Deltas gave their annual house dance.
Hugh looked forward to it with considerable pleasure. True, he was not
"dragging a woman," but several of the brothers were going "stag"; so he
felt completely at ease.

The freshmen were put to work cleaning the house, the curtains were sent
to the laundry, bedroom closets and dresser drawers were emptied of
anything the girls might find too interesting, and an enormously
expensive orchestra was imported from New York. Finally a number of
young alumni, the four patronesses, and the girls appeared.

Getting dressed for the dance was a real event in Hugh's life. He had
worn evening clothes only a few times before, but those occasions,
fraternity banquets and glee club concerts, were, he felt, relatively
unimportant. The dance, however, was different, and he felt that he must
look his best, his very "smoothest." He was a rare undergraduate; he
owned everything necessary to wear to an evening function--at least,
everything an undergraduate considered necessary. He did not own a
dress-suit, and he would have had no use for it if he had; only Tuxedos
were worn.

He dressed with great care, tying and retying his tie until it was
knotted perfectly. When at last he drew on his jacket, he looked himself
over in the mirror with considerable satisfaction. He knew that he was
dressed right.

It hardly entered his mind that he was an exceedingly good-looking young
man. Vanity was not one of his faults. But he had good reason to be
pleased with the image he was examining for any sartorial defects. He
had brushed his sandy brown hair until it shone; his shave had left his
slender cheeks almost as smooth as a girl's; his blue eyes were very
bright and clear; and the black suit emphasized his blond cleanness: it
was a wholesome-looking, attractive youth who finally pulled on his
top-coat and started happily across the campus for the Nu Delta house.

The dance was just starting when he arrived. The patronesses were in the
library, a small room off the living-room. Hugh learned later that six
men had been delegated to keep the patronesses in the library and
adequately entertained. The men worked in shifts, and although the dance
lasted until three the next morning, not a patroness got a chance to
wander unchaperoned around the house.

The living-room of the Nu Delta house was so large that it was
unnecessary to use the dining-room for a dance. Therefore, most of the
big chairs and divans had been moved into the dining-room--and the
dining-room was dark.

Hugh permitted himself to be presented to the patronesses, mumbled a few
polite words, and then joined the stag line, waiting for a chance to cut
in. Presently a couple moved slowly by, so slowly that they did not seem
to move at all. The girl was Hester Sheville, and Hugh had been
introduced to her in the afternoon. Despite rather uneven features and
red hair, she was almost pretty; and in her green evening gown, which
was cut daringly low, she was flashing and attractive.

Hugh stepped forward and tapped her partner on the shoulder. The brother
released her with a grimace at Hugh, and Hester, without a word, put her
right hand in Hugh's left and slipped her left arm around his neck. They
danced in silence for a time, bodies pressed close together, swaying in
place, hardly advancing. Presently, however, Hester drew her head back
and spoke.

"Hot stuff, isn't it?" she asked lazily.

Hugh was startled. Her breath was redolent of whisky.

"Sure is," he replied and executed a difficult step, the girl following
him without the slightest difficulty. She danced remarkably, but he was
glad when he was tapped on the shoulder and another brother claimed
Hester. The whisky breath had repelled him.

As the evening wore on he danced with a good many girls who had whisky
breaths. One girl clung to him as they danced and whispered, "Hold me
up, kid; I'm ginned." He had to rush a third, a dainty blond child, to
the porch railing. She wasn't a pretty sight as she vomited into the
garden; nor did Hugh find her gasped comment, "The seas are rough
to-night," amusing. Another girl went sound asleep in a chair and had to
be carried up-stairs and put to bed.

A number of the brothers were hilarious; a few had drunk too much and
were sick; one had a "crying jag." There were men there, however, who
were not drinking at all, and they were making gallant efforts to keep
the sober girls away from the less sober girls and the inebriated
brothers.

Hugh was not drinking. The idea of drinking at a dance was offensive to
him; he thought it insulting to the girls. The fact that some of the
girls were drinking horrified him. He didn't mind their smoking--well,
not very much; but drinking? That was going altogether too far.

About midnight he danced again with Hester Sheville, not because he
wanted to but because she had insisted. He had been standing gloomily in
the doorway watching the bacchanalian scene, listening to the tom-tom
of the drums when she came up to him.

"I wanta dance," she said huskily. "I wanta dance with you--you--you
blond beast." Seeing no way to decline to dance with the half-drunk
girl, he put his arm around her and started off. Hester's tongue was no
longer in control, but her feet followed his unerringly. When the music
stopped, she whispered, "Take me--ta-take me to th' th' dining-room."
Wonderingly, Hugh led her across the hall. He had not been in the
dining-room since the dance started, and he was amazed and shocked to
find half a dozen couples in the big chairs or on the divans in close
embrace. He paused, but Hester led him to an empty chair, shoved him
clumsily down into it, and then flopped down on his lap.

"Le's--le's pet," she whispered. "I wanna pet."

Again Hugh smelled the whisky fumes as she put her hot mouth to his and
kissed him hungrily. He was angry, angry and humiliated. He tried to get
up, to force the girl off of his lap, but she clung tenaciously to him,
striving insistently to kiss him on the mouth. Finally Hugh's anger got
the better of his manners; he stood up, the girl hanging to his neck,
literally tore her arms off of him, took her by the waist and set her
down firmly in the chair.

"Sit there," he said softly, viciously; "sit there."

She began to cry, and he walked rapidly out of the dining-room, his
cheeks flaming and his eyes flashing; and the embracing couples paid no
attention to him at all. He had to pass the door of the library to get
his top-coat--he made up his mind to get out of the "goddamned
house"--and was walking quickly by the door when one of the patronesses
called to him.

"Oh, Mr. Carver. Will you come here a minute?"

"Surely, Mrs. Reynolds." He entered the library and waited before the
dowager.

"I left my wrap up-stairs--in Mr. Merrill's room, I think it is. I am
getting a little chilly. Won't you get it for me?"

"Of course. It's in Merrill's room?"

"I think it is. It's right at the head of the stairs. The wrap's blue
with white fur."

Hugh ran up the stairs, opened Merrill's door, switched on the lights,
and immediately spotted the wrap lying over the back of a chair. He
picked it up and was about to leave the room when a noise behind him
attracted his attention. He turned and saw a man and a girl lying on the
bed watching him.

Hugh stared blankly at them, his mouth half open.

"Get th' hell out of here," the man said roughly.

For an instant Hugh continued to stare; then he whirled about, walked
out of the room, slammed the door behind him, and hurried down the
stairs. He delivered the wrap to Mrs. Reynolds, and two minutes later he
was out of the house walking, almost running, across the campus to
Surrey Hall. Once there, he tore off his top-coat, his jacket, his
collar and tie, and threw himself down into a chair.

So this was college! This was the fraternity--that goddamned rat house!
That was what he had pledged allegiance to, was it? Those were his
brothers, were they? Brothers! Brothers!

He fairly leaped out of his chair and began to pace the floor. College!
Gentlemen! A lot of muckers chasing around with a bunch of rats; that's
what they were. Great thing--fraternities. No doubt about it, they were
a great institution.

He paused in his mental tirade, suddenly conscious of the fact that he
wasn't fair. Some of the fraternities, he knew, would never stand for
any such performance as he had witnessed that evening; most of them, he
was sure, wouldn't. It was just the Nu Deltas and one or two others;
well, maybe three or four. So that's what he had joined, was it?

He thought of Hester Sheville, of her whisky breath, her lascivious
pawing--and his hands clenched. "Filthy little rat," he said aloud, "the
stinkin', rotten rat."

Then he remembered that there had been girls there who hadn't drunk
anything, girls who somehow managed to move through the whole orgy calm
and sweet. His anger mounted. It was a hell of a way to treat a decent
girl, to ask her to a dance with a lot of drunkards and soused rats.

He was warm with anger. Reckless of the buttons, he tore off his
waistcoat and threw it on a chair. The jeweled fraternity pin by the
pocket caught his eye. He stared at it for a moment and then slowly
unpinned it. He let it lie in his hand and addressed it aloud, hardly
aware of the fact that he was speaking at all.

"So that's what you stand for, is it? For snobs and politicians and
muckers. Well, I don't want any more of you--not--one--damn--bit--
more--of--you."

He tossed the pin indifferently upon the center-table, making up his
mind that he would resign from the fraternity the next day.

When the next day came he found, however, that his anger had somewhat
abated. He was still indignant, but he didn't have the courage to go
through with his resignation. Such an action, he knew, would mean a
great deal of publicity, publicity impossible to avoid. The fraternity
would announce its acceptance of his resignation in "The Sanford Daily
News"; and then he would either have to lie or start a scandal.

As the days went by and he thought more and more about the dance, he
began to doubt his indignation. Wasn't he after all a prude to get so
hot? Wasn't he perhaps a prig, a sissy? At times he thought that he was;
at other times he was sure that he wasn't. He could be permanently sure
of only one thing, that he was a cynic.




CHAPTER XX


Hugh avoided the Nu Delta house for the remainder of the term and spent
more time on his studies than he had since he had entered college. The
result was, of course, that he made a good record, and the A that Henley
gave him in English delighted him so much that he almost forgot his
fraternity troubles. Not quite, however. During the first few weeks of
the vacation he often thought of talking to his father about Nu Delta,
but he could not find the courage to destroy his father's illusions. He
found, too, that he couldn't talk to his mother about things that he had
seen and learned at college. Like most of his friends, he felt that "the
folks wouldn't understand."

He spent the first two months at home working on the farm, but when
Norry Parker invited him to visit him for a month on Long Island Sound,
Hugh accepted the invitation and departed for the Parker summer cottage
in high feather. He was eager to see Norry again, but he was even more
eager to see New York. He had just celebrated his twentieth birthday,
and he considered it disgraceful that he had never visited the "Big
City," as New York was always known at Sanford. Norry met him at Grand
Central, a livelier and more robust Norry than Hugh had ever seen. The
boy actually seemed like a boy and not a sprite; his cheeks were tanned
almost brown, and his gray eyes danced with excitement when he spotted
Hugh in the crowd.

"Gee, Hugh, I'm glad to see you," he exclaimed, shaking Hugh's hand
joyously. "I'm tickled to death that you could come."

"So am I," said Hugh heartily, really happy to see Norry looking so
well, and thrilled to be in New York. "Gosh, you look fine. I hardly
know you. Where'd you get all the pep?"

"Swimming' and sailing. This is the first summer I've been well enough
to swim all I want to. Oh, it's pretty down where we are. You'll love
the nights, Hugh. The Sound is wonderful."

"I'll bet. Well, where do we go from here? Say, this is certainly a
whale of a station, isn't it? It makes me feel like a hick."

"Oh, you'll get over that soon enough," Norry, the seasoned New Yorker,
assured him easily. "We're going right out to the cottage. It's too hot
to-day to run around the city, but we'll come in soon and you can give
it the once-over." He took Hugh's arm and led him out of the station.

It had never entered Hugh's mind that Norry's father might be rich. He
had noticed that Norry's clothes were very well tailored, and Norry had
told him that his violin was a Cremona, but the boy was not lavish with
money and never talked about it at all. Hugh was therefore surprised and
a little startled to see Norry walk up to an expensive limousine with a
uniformed chauffeur at the wheel. He wondered if the Parkers weren't too
high-hat for him?

"We'll go right home, Martin," Norry said to the chauffeur. "Get in,
Hugh."

The Parker cottage was a short distance from New Rochelle. It was a
beautiful place, hardly in the style of a Newport "cottage" but roomy
and very comfortable. It was not far from the water, and the Parkers
owned their own boat-house.

Mrs. Parker was on the veranda when the car drew up at the steps.

"Hello, Mother," Norry called.

She got up and ran lightly down the steps, her hand held out in welcome
to Hugh.

"I know that you are Hugh Carver," she said in a beautifully modulated
voice, "and I am really delighted to meet you. Norry has talked so much
about you that I should have felt cheated if you hadn't come."

Hugh's fears immediately departed. "I should have myself," he replied.
"It was awfully good of you to invite me."

After meeting Norry's father and mother, Hugh understood the boy
better. Mrs. Parker was both charming and pretty, a delightful woman who
played the piano with professional skill. Mr. Parker was an artist, a
portrait-painter, and he got prices for his pictures that staggered Hugh
when Norry mentioned them casually. He was a quiet, grave man with gray
eyes like his son's.

When he had a minute alone with Hugh, he said to him with simple
sincerity: "You have been very kind to Norry, and we are grateful. He is
a strange, poetic lad who needs the kind of understanding friendship you
have given him. We should have been deeply disappointed if you hadn't
been able to visit us."

The expressions of gratitude embarrassed Hugh, but they made him feel
sure of his welcome; and once he was sure of that he began to enjoy
himself as he never had before. Before the month was out, he had made
many visits to New York and was able to talk about both the Ritz and
Macdougal Alley with elaborate casualness when he returned to college.
He and Norry went swimming nearly every day and spent hours sailing on
the Sound.

Norry introduced him to the many girls who had summer homes near the
Parker cottage. They were a new type to him, boarding-school products,
sure of themselves, "finished" with a high polish that glittered
effectively, daringly frank both in their speech and their actions,
beautiful dancers, good swimmers, full of "dirt," as they called gossip,
and as offhand with men as they were with each other. Within a week Hugh
got over his prejudice against women's smoking. Nearly every woman he
met, including Mrs. Parker, smoked, and every girl carried her
cigarette-case.

Most of the girls treated Norry as if he were a very nice small boy, but
they adopted a different attitude toward Hugh. They flirted with him,
perfected his "petting" technique, occasionally treated him to a drink,
and made no pretense of hiding his attraction for them.

At first Hugh was startled and a little repelled, but he soon grew to
like the frankness, the petting, and the liquor; and he was having a
much too exciting time to pause often for criticism of himself or
anybody else. It was during the last week of his visit that he fell in
love.

He and Norry were standing near the float watching a number of swimmers.
Suddenly Hugh was attracted by a girl he had never seen before. She wore
a red one-piece bathing-suit that revealed every curve of her slender,
boyish figure. She noticed Norry and threw up her arm in greeting.

"Who is she?" Hugh demanded eagerly.

"Cynthia Day. She's just back from visiting friends in Maine. She's an
awfully good swimmer. Watch her." The girl poised for an instant on the
edge of the float and then dived gracefully into the water, striking out
with a powerful overhand stroke for another float a quarter of a mile
out in the Sound. The boys watched her red cap as she rounded the float
and started back, swimming easily and expertly. When she reached the
beach, she ran out of the water, rubbed her hands over her face, and
then strolled over to Norry.

Her hair was concealed by a red bathing-cap, but Hugh guessed that it
was brown; at any rate, her eyes were brown and very large. She had an
impudent little nose and full red lips.

"'Lo, Norry," she said, holding out her hand. "How's the infant?"

"Oh, I'm fine. This is my friend Hugh Carver."

"I've heard about you," she said as they shook hands. "I only got back
last night, but everybody seems to be digging dirt about Norry's friend.
Three of my friends are enemies on account of you, and one of 'em says
she's going in swimming some day and forget to come back if you don't
give her a little more time."

Hugh blushed, but he had learned a few things in the past weeks.

"I wish they would tell me about it," he said with a fair assumption of
ease. "Why didn't you come back sooner?" He was pleased with that
speech. He wouldn't have dared it a month before.

The brown eyes smiled at him. "Because I didn't know you were here. You
haven't got a cigarette about you, have you? Norry's useless when it
comes to smokes."

Hugh did have a package of cigarettes. She took one, put it in her
mouth, and waited for Hugh to light it for her. When he did, she gazed
curiously over the flame at him. She puffed the cigarette for a moment
and then said, "You look like a good egg. Let's talk." She threw herself
down on the sand, and the boys sat down beside her.

From that moment Hugh was lost. For the remaining days of the visit he
spent every possible moment with Cynthia, fascinated by her chatter,
thrilled by the touch of her hand. She made no objection when he offered
shyly to kiss her; she quietly put her arms around his neck and turned
her face up to his--and her kisses set him aflame.

For once, he did not want to return to college, and when he arrived in
Haydensville he felt none of his usual enthusiasm. The initiation of the
freshmen amused him only slightly, and the football games did not seem
so important as they had the two previous years. A letter from Cynthia
was the most important thing in the world, and she wrote good letters,
chatty, gay, and affectionate.

Custom made it necessary for him to room in the fraternity house. It was
an unwritten law of Nu Delta that all members live in the house their
last two years, and Hugh hardly dared to contest the law. There were
four men in the chapter whom he thoroughly liked and with whom he would
have been glad to room, but they all had made their arrangements by the
time he spoke to them; so he was forced to accept Paul Vinton's
invitation to room with him.

Vinton was a cheerful youth with too much money and not enough sense. He
wanted desperately to be thought a good fellow, a "regular guy," and he
was willing to buy popularity if necessary by standing treat to any one
every chance he got. He was known all over the campus as a "prize
sucker."

He bored Hugh excessively by his confidences and almost offensive
generosity. He always had a supply of Scotch whisky on hand, and he
offered it to him so constantly that Hugh drank too much because it was
easier and pleasanter to drink than to refuse.

Tucker had graduated, and the new president, Leonard Gates, was an
altogether different sort of man. There had been a fight in the
fraternity over his election. The "regular guys" opposed him and offered
one of their own number as a candidate. Gates, however, was prominent in
campus activities and had his own following in the house; as a result,
he was elected by a slight margin.

He won Hugh's loyalty at the first fraternity meeting after he took the
chair. "Some things are going to be changed in this house," he said
sternly, "or I will bring influence to bear that will change them."
Every one knew that he referred to the national president of the
fraternity. "There will be no more drunken brawls in this house such as
we had at the last house dance. Any one who brings a cheap woman into
this house at a dance will hear from it. Both my fiancee and my sister
were at the last dance. I do not intend that they shall be insulted
again. This is not a bawdy-house, and I want some of you to remember
that."

He tried very hard to pass a rule, such as many of the fraternities had,
that no one could bring liquor into the house and that there should be
no gambling. He failed, however. The brothers took his scolding about
the dance because most of them were heartily ashamed of that occasion;
but they announced that they did not intend to have the chapter turned
into the S.C.A., which was the Sanford Christian Association. It would
have been well for Hugh if the law had been passed. Vinton's insistent
generosity was rapidly turning him into a steady drinker. He did not get
drunk, but he was taking down more high-balls than were good for him.

Outside of his drinking, however, he was leading a virtuous and, on the
whole, an industrious life. He was too much in love with Cynthia Day to
let his mind dwell on other women, and he had become sufficiently
interested in his studies to like them for their own sake.

A change had come over the campus. It was inexplicable but highly
significant. There had been evidences of it the year before, but now it
became so evident that even some of the members of the faculty were
aware of it. Intolerance seemed to be dying, and the word "wet" was
heard less often. The undergraduates were forsaking their old gods. The
wave of materialism was swept back by an in-rushing tide of idealism.
Students suddenly ceased to concentrate in economics and filled the
English and philosophy classes to overflowing.

No one was able really to explain the causes for the change, but it was
there and welcome. The "Sanford Literary Magazine," which had been
slowly perishing for several years, became almost as popular as the "Cap
and Bells," the comic magazine, which coined money by publishing risque
jokes and pictures of slightly dressed women. A poetry magazine daringly
made its appearance on the campus and, to the surprise of its editors,
was received so cordially that they were able to pay the printer's bill.

It became the fashion to read. Instructors in English were continually
being asked what the best new books were or if such and such a book was
all that it was "cracked up to be." If the instructor hadn't read the
book, he was treated to a look of contempt that sent him hastening to
the library.

Of course, not all of the undergraduates took to reading and thinking;
the millennium had not arrived, but the intelligent majority began to
read and discuss books openly, and the intelligent majority ruled the
campus.

Hugh was one of the most enthusiastic of the readers. He was taking a
course in nineteenth-century poetry with Blake, the head of the English
department. His other instructors either bored him or left him cold, but
Blake turned each class hour into a thrilling experience. He was a
handsome man with gray hair, dark eyes, and a magnificent voice. He
taught poetry almost entirely by reading it, only occasionally
interpolating an explanatory remark, and he read beautifully. His
reading was dramatic, almost tricky; but it made the poems live for his
students, and they reveled in his classes.

Hugh's junior year was made almost beautiful by that poetry course and
by his adoration for Cynthia. He was writing verses constantly--and he
found "Cynthia" an exceedingly troublesome word; it seemed as if nothing
would rime with it. At times he thought of taking to free verse, but the
results of his efforts did not satisfy him. He always had the feeling
that he had merely chopped up some rather bad prose; and he was
invariably right. Cynthia wrote him that she loved the poems he sent
her because they were so passionate. He blushed when he read her praise.
It disturbed him. He wished that she had used a different word.




CHAPTER XXI


For the first term Hugh slid comfortably down a well oiled groove of
routine. He went to the movies regularly, wrote as regularly to Cynthia
and thought about her even more, read enormous quantities of poetry,
"bulled" with his friends, attended all the athletic contests, played
cards occasionally, and received his daily liquor from Vinton. He no
longer protested when Vinton offered him a drink; he accepted it as a
matter of course, and he had almost completely forgotten that "smoking
wasn't good for a runner." He had just about decided that he wasn't a
runner, anyway.

One evening in early spring he met George Winsor as he was crossing the
campus.

"Hello, George. Where are you going?"

"Over to Ted Alien's room. Big poker party to-night. Don't you want to
sit in?"

"You told me last week that you had sworn off poker. How come you're
playing again so soon?" Hugh strolled lazily along with Winsor.

"Not poker, Hugh--craps. I've sworn off craps for good, and maybe I'll
swear off poker after to-night. I'm nearly a hundred berries to the good
right now, and I can afford to play if I want to."

"I'm a little ahead myself," said Hugh. "I don't play very often,
though, except in the house when the fellows insist. I can't shoot craps
at all, and I get tired of cards after a couple of hours."

"I'm a damn fool to play," Winsor asserted positively, "a plain damn
fool, I oughtn't to waste my time at it, but I'm a regular fiend for the
game. I get a great kick out of it. How's to sit in with us? There's
only going to be half a dozen fellows. Two-bit limit."

"Yeah, it'll start with a two-bit limit, but after an hour deuces'll be
wild all over the place and the sky will be the limit. I've sat in those
games before."

Winsor laughed. "Guess you're right, but what's the odds? Better shoot a
few hands."

"Well, all-right, but I can't stay later than eleven. I've got a quiz in
eccy to-morrow, and I've got to bone up on it some time to-night."

"I've got that quiz, too. I'll leave with you at eleven."

Winsor and Hugh entered the dormitory and climbed the stairs. Allen's
door was open, and several undergraduates were lolling around the room,
smoking and chatting. They welcomed the new-comers with shouts of "Hi,
Hugh," and "Hi, George."

Allen had a large round table in the center of his study, and the boys
soon had it cleared for action. Allen tossed the cards upon the table,
produced several ash-trays, and then carefully locked the door.

"Keep an ear open for Mac," he admonished his friends; "He's warned me
twice now," "Mac" was the night-watchman, and he had a way of dropping
in unexpectedly on gambling parties. "Here are the chips. You count 'em
out, George. Two-bit limit."

The boys drew up chairs to the table, lighted cigarettes or pipes, and
began the game. Hugh had been right; the "two-bit limit" was soon
lifted, and Allen urged his guests to go as far as they liked.

There were ugly rumors about Allen around the campus. He was good
looking, belonged to a fraternity in high standing, wore excellent
clothes, and did fairly well in his studies; but the rumors persisted.
There were students who insisted that he hadn't the conscience of a
snake, and a good many of them hinted that no honest man ever had such
consistently good luck at cards and dice.

The other boys soon got heated and talkative, but Allen said little
besides announcing his bids. His blue eyes remained coldly
expressionless whether he won or lost the hand; his crisp, curly brown
hair remained neatly combed and untouched by a nervous hand; his lips
parted occasionally in a quiet smile: he was the perfect gambler, never
excited, always in absolute control of himself.

Hugh marveled at the control as the evening wore on. He was excited,
and, try as he would, he could not keep his excitement from showing.
Luck, however, was with him; by ten o'clock he was seventy-five dollars
ahead, and most of it was Allen's money.

Hugh passed by three hands in succession, unwilling to take any chances.
He had decided to "play close," never betting unless he held something
worth putting his money on.

Allen dealt the fourth hand. "Ante up," he said quietly. The five other
men followed his lead in tossing chips into the center of the table. He
looked at his hand. "Two blue ones if you want to stay in." Winsor and
two of the men threw down their cards, but Hugh and a lad named Mandel
each shoved two blue chips into the pot.

Hugh had three queens and an ace. "One card," he said to Allen. Allen
tossed him the card, and Hugh's heart leaped when he saw that it was an
ace.

"Two cards, Ted," Mandel requested, nervously crushing his cigarette in
an ash-tray. He picked up the cards one at a time, lifting each slowly
by one corner, and peeking at it as if he were afraid that a sudden full
view would blast him to eternity. His face did not change expression as
he added the cards to the three that he held in his hand.

"I'm sitting pretty," Allen remarked casually, picking up the five
cards that he had laid down before he dealt.

The betting began, Hugh nervous, openly excited, Mandel stonily calm,
Allen completely at ease. At first the bets were for a dollar, but they
gradually rose to five. Mandel threw down his cards.

"Fight it out," he said morosely. "I've thrown away twenty-five bucks,
and I'll be damned if I'm going to throw away any more to see your
four-flushes."

Allen lifted a pile of chips and let them fall lightly, clicking a rapid
staccato. "It'll cost you ten dollars to see my hand, Hugh," he said
quietly.

"It'll cost you twenty if you want to see mine," Hugh responded, tossing
the equivalent to thirty dollars into the pot. He watched Allen eagerly,
but Allen's face remained quite impassive as he raised Hugh another ten.

The four boys who weren't playing leaned forward, pipes or cigarettes in
their mouths, their stomachs pressed against the table, their eyes
narrowed and excited. The air was a stench of stale smoke; the silence
between bets was electric.

The betting continued, Hugh sure that Allen was bluffing, but Allen
never failed to raise him ten dollars on every bet. Finally Hugh had a
hundred dollars in the pot and dared not risk more on his hand.

"I think you're bluffing, goddamn it," he said, his voice shrill and
nervous. "I'll call you. Show your stinkin' hand."

"Oh, not so stinkin'," Allen replied lightly. "I've got four of a kind,
all of 'em kings. Let's see your three deuces."

He tossed down his hand, and Hugh slumped in his chair at the sight of
the four kings. He shoved the pile of chips toward Allen. "Take the pot,
damn you. Of all the bastard luck. Look!" He slapped down his cards
angrily. "A full house, queens up. Christ!" He burst into a flood of
obscenity, the other boys listening sympathetically, all except Allen
who was carefully stacking the chips.

In a few minutes Hugh's anger died. He remembered that he was only about
twenty-five dollars behind and that he had an hour in which to recover
them. His face became set and hard; his hands lost their jerky
eagerness. He played carefully, never daring to enter a big pot, never
betting for more than his hands were worth.

As the bets grew larger, the room grew quieter. Every one was smoking
constantly; the air was heavy with smoke, and the stench grew more and
more foul. Outside of a soft, "I raise you twenty," or, even, "Fifty
bucks if you want to see my hand," a muttered oath or a request to buy
chips, there was hardly a word said. The excitement was so intense that
it hurt; the expletives smelled of the docks.

At times there was more than five hundred dollars in a pot, and five
times out of seven when the pot was big, Allen won it. Win or lose, he
continued cool and calm, at times smoking a pipe, other times puffing
nonchalantly at a cigarette.

The acrid smoke cut Hugh's eyes; they smarted and pained, but he
continued to light cigarette after cigarette, drawing the smoke deep
into his lungs, hardly aware of the fact that they hurt.

He won and lost, won and lost, but gradually he won back the twenty-five
dollars and a little more. The college clock struck eleven. He knew that
he ought to go, but he wondered if he could quit with honor when he was
ahead.

"I ought to go," he said hesitatingly. "I told George when I said that
I'd sit in that I'd have to leave at eleven. I've got an eccy quiz
to-morrow that I've got to study for."

"Oh, don't leave now," one of the men said excitedly. "Why, hell, man,
the game's just getting warm."

"I know," Hugh agreed, "and I hate like hell to quit, but I've really
got to beat it. Besides, the stakes are too big for me. I can't afford a
game like this."

"You can afford it as well as I can," Mandel said irritably. "I'm over
two hundred berries in the hole right now, and you can goddamn well bet
that I'm not going to leave until I get them back."

"Well, I'm a hundred and fifty to the bad," Winsor announced miserably,
"but I've got to go. If I don't hit that eccy, I'm going to be out of
luck." He shoved back his chair. "I hate like hell to leave; but I
promised Hugh that I'd leave with him at eleven, and I've got to do it."

Allen had been quite indifferent when Hugh said that he was leaving.
Hugh was obviously small money, and Allen had no time to waste on
chicken-feed, but Winsor was a different matter.

"You don't want to go, George, when you're in the hole. Better stick
around. Maybe you'll win it back. Your luck can't be bad all night."

"You're right," said Winsor, stretching mightily. "It can't be bad all
night, but I can't hang around all night to watch it change. You're
welcome to the hundred and fifty, Ted, but some night soon I'm coming
over and take it away from you."

Allen laughed. "Any time you say, George."

Hugh and Winsor settled their accounts, then stood up, aching and weary,
their muscles cramped from three hours of sitting and nervous tension.
They said brief good nights, unlocked the door--they heard Allen lock it
behind them--and left their disgruntled friends, glad to be out of the
noisome odor of the room.

"God, what luck!" Winsor exclaimed as they started down the hall. "I'm
off Allen for good. That boy wins big pots too regularly and always
loses the little ones. I bet he's a cold-deck artist or something."

"He's something all right," Hugh agreed. "Cripes, I feel dirty and
stinko. I feel as if I'd been in a den."

"You have been. Say, what's that?" They had almost traversed the length
of the long hall when Winsor stopped suddenly, taking Hugh by the arm. A
door was open, and they could hear somebody reading.

"What's what?" Hugh asked, a little startled by the suddenness of
Winsor's question.

"Listen. That poem, I've heard it somewhere before. What is it?"

Hugh listened a moment and then said: "Oh, that's the poem Prof Blake
read us the other day--you know, 'marpessa.' It's about the shepherd,
_Apollo_, and _Marpessa_. It's great stuff. Listen."

They remained standing in the deserted hall, the voice coming clearly to
them through the open doorway. "It's Freddy Fowler," Winsor whispered.
"He can sure read."

The reading stopped, and they heard Fowler say to some one, presumably
his room-mate: "This is the part that I like best. Get it," Then he read
_Idas's_ plea to _Marpessa_:


                "'After such argument what can I plead?
                  Or what pale promise make? Yet since it is
                  In women to pity rather than to aspire,
                  A little I will speak. I love thee then
                  Not only for thy body packed with sweet
                  Of all this world, that cup of brimming June,
                  That jar of violet wine set in the air,
                  That palest rose sweet in the night of life;
                  Nor for that stirring bosom, all besieged
                  By drowsing lovers, or thy perilous hair;
                  Nor for that face that might indeed provoke
                  Invasion of old cities; no, nor all
                  Thy freshness stealing on me like strange sleep.'"


Winsor's hand tightened on Hugh's arm, and the two boys stood almost
rigid listening to the young voice, which was trembling with emotion,
rich with passion:


                "'Not only for this do I love thee, but
                  Because Infinity upon thee broods;
                  And thou are full of whispers and of shadows.
                  Thou meanest what the sea has striven to say
                  So long, and yearned up the cliffs to tell;
                  Thou art what all the winds have uttered not,
                  What the still night suggesteth to the heart.
                  Thy voice is like to music heard ere birth,
                  Some spirit lute touched on a spirit sea;
                  Thy face remembered is from other worlds,
                  It has been died for, though I know not when,
                  It has been sung of, though I know not where.'"


"God," Winsor whispered, "that's beautiful."

"Hush. This is the best part."


                "'It has the strangeness of the luring West,
                  And of sad sea-horizons; beside thee
                  I am aware of other times and lands,
                  Of birth far back, of lives in many stars.
                  O beauty lone and like a candle clear
                  In this dark country of the world! Thou art
                  My woe, my early light, my music dying.'"


Hugh and Winsor remained silent while the young voice went on reading
_Maressa's_ reply, her gentle refusal of the god and her proud
acceptance, of the mortal. Finally they heard the last words:


                "When she had spoken, Idas with one cry
                 Held her, and there was silence; while the god
                 In anger disappeared. Then slowly they,
                 He looking downward, and she gazing up,
                 Into the evening green wandered away."


When the voice paused, the poem done, the two boys walked slowly down
the hall, down the steps, and out into the cool night air. Neither said
a Word until they were half-way across the campus. Then Winsor spoke
softly:

"God! Wasn't that beautiful?"

"Yes--beautiful." Hugh's voice was hardly more than a whisper.
"Beautiful.... It--it--oh, it makes me--kinda ashamed."

"Me, too. Poker when we can have that! We're awful fools, Hugh."

"Yes--awful fools."




CHAPTER XXII


Prom came early in May, and Hugh looked forward to it joyously, partly
because it would be his first Prom and partly because Cynthia was
coming. Cynthia! He thought of her constantly, dreamed of her, wrote
poems about her and to her. At times his longing for her swelled into an
ecstasy of desire that racked and tore him. He was lost in love, his
moods sweeping him from lyric happiness to black despair. He wrote to
her several times a week, and between letters he took long walks
composing dithyrambic epistles that fortunately were never written.

When he received her letter saying that she would come to Prom, he
yelled like a lunatic, pounded the astonished Vinton on the back, and
raced down-stairs to the living-room.

"She's coming!" he shouted.

There were several men in the room, and they all turned and looked at
him, some of them grinning broadly.

"What th' hell, Hugh?" Leonard Gates asked amiably. "Who's coming? Who's
she?"

Hugh blushed and shuffled his feet. He knew that he had laid himself
open to a "royal razzing," but he proceeded to bluff himself out of the
dilemma.

"She? Oh, yes, she. Well, she is she. Altogether divine, Len." He was
trying hard to be casual and flippant, but his eyes were dancing and his
lips trembled with smiles.

Gates grinned at him. "A poor bluff, old man--a darn poor bluff. You're
in love, _pauvre enfant_, and I'm afraid that you're in a very bad way.
Come on, tell us the lady's name, her pedigree, and list of charms."

Hugh grinned back at Gates. "Chase yourself," he said gaily. "I won't
tell you a blamed thing about her."

"You'd better," said Jim Saunders from the depths of a leather chair.
"Is she the jane whose picture adorns your desk?"

"Yeah," Hugh admitted. "How do you like her?"

"Very fair, very fair." Saunders was magnificently lofty. "I've seen
better, of course, but I've seen worse, too. Not bad--um, not very bad."

The "razzing" had started, and Hugh lost his nerve.

"Jim, you can go to hell," he said definitely, prepared to rush
up-stairs before Saunders could reply. "You don't know a queen when you
see one. Why, Cynthia--"

"Cynthia!" four of the boys shouted. "So her name's Cynthia. That's--"

But Hugh was half-way up-stairs, embarrassed and delighted.

The girls arrived on Thursday, the train which brought most of them
reaching Haydensville early in the afternoon. Hugh paced up and down the
station, trying to keep up a pretense of a conversation with two or
three others. He gave the wrong reply twice and then decided to say
nothing more. He listened with his whole body for the first whistle of
the train, and so great was the chatter of the hundreds of waiting
youths that he never heard it. Suddenly the engine rounded a curve, and
a minute later the train stopped before the station. Immediately the
boys began to mill around the platform like cattle about to stampede,
standing on their toes to look over the heads of their comrades,
shoving, shouting, dancing in their impatience.

Girls began to descend the steps of the cars. The stampede broke. A
youth would see "his girl" and start through the crowd for her. Dozens
spotted their girls at the same time and tried to run through the crowd.
They bumped into one another, laughed joyously, bumped into somebody
else, and finally reached the girl.

When Hugh eventually saw Cynthia standing on a car platform near him, he
shouted to her and held his hand high in greeting. She saw him and waved
back, at the same time starting down the steps.

She had a little scarlet hat pulled down over her curly brown hair, and
she wore a simple blue traveling-suit that set off her slender figure
perfectly. Her eyes seemed bigger and browner than ever, her nose more
impudently tilted, her mouth more supremely irresistible. Her cheeks
were daintily rouged, her eyebrows plucked into a thin arch. She was New
York from her small pumps to the expensively simple scarlet hat.

Hugh dashed several people aside and grabbed her hand, squeezing it
unmercifully.

"Oh, gee, Cynthia, I'm glad to see you. I thought the darn train was
never going to get here. How are you? Gee, you're looking great,
wonderful. Where's your suit-case?" He fairly stuttered in his
excitement, his words toppling over each other.

"I'm full of pep. You look wonderful. There's my suit-case, the big
black one. Give the porter two bits or something. I haven't any change."
Hugh tipped the porter, picked up the suit-case with one hand, and took
Cynthia by the arm with the other, carefully piloting her through the
noisy, surging crowd of boys and girls, all of them talking at top speed
and in high, excited voices.

Once Hugh and Cynthia were off the platform they could talk without
shouting.

"We've got to walk up the hill," Hugh explained miserably. "I couldn't
get a car for love nor money. I'm awfully sorry."

Cynthia did a dance-step and petted his arm happily. "What do I care?
I'm so--so damn glad to see you, Hugh. You look nicer'n ever--just as
clean and washed and sweet. Ooooh, look at him blush! Stop it or I'll
have to kiss you right here. Stop it, I say."

But Hugh went right on blushing. "Go ahead," he said bravely. "I wish
you would."

Cynthia laughed. "Like fun you do. You'd die of embarrassment. But your
mouth is an awful temptation. You have the sweetest mouth, Hugh. It's so
damn kissable."

She continued to banter him until they reached the fraternity house.
"Where do I live?" she demanded. "In your room, I hope."

"Yep. I'm staying down in Keller Hall with Norry Parker. His room-mate's
sick in the hospital; so he's got room for me. Norry's going to see you
later."

"Right-o. What do we do when I get six pounds of dirt washed off and
some powder on my nose?"

"Well, we're having a tea-dance here at the house at four-thirty; but
we've got an hour till then, and I thought we'd take a walk. I want to
show you the college."

After Cynthia had repaired the damages of travel and had been introduced
to Hugh's fraternity brothers and their girls, she and Hugh departed
for a tour of the campus. The lawns were so green that the grass seemed
to be bursting with color; the elms waved tiny new leaves in a faint
breeze; the walls of the buildings were speckled with green patches of
ivy. Cynthia was properly awed by the chapel and enthusiastic over the
other buildings. She assured Hugh that Sanford men looked awfully smooth
in their knickers and white flannels; in fact, she said the whole
college seemed jake to her.

They wandered past the lake and into the woods as if by common consent.
Once they were out of sight of passers-by, Hugh paused and turned to
Cynthia. Without a word she stepped into his arms and lifted her face to
his, Hugh's heart seemed to stop; he was so hungry for that kiss, he had
waited so long for it.

When he finally took his lips from hers, Cynthia whispered softly,
"You're such a good egg, Hugh honey, such a damn good egg."

Hugh could say nothing; he just held her close, his mind swimming
dizzily, his whole being atingle. For a long time he held her, kissing
her, now tenderly, now almost brutally, lost in a thrill of passion.

Finally she whispered faintly: "No more, Hugh. Not now, dear."

Hugh released her reluctantly. "I love you so damned hard, Cynthia," he
said huskily. "I--I can't keep my hands off of you."

"I know," she replied. "But we've got to go back. Wait a minute,
though. I must look like the devil." She straightened her hat, powdered
her nose, and then tucked her arm in his.

After the tea-dance and dinner, Hugh left her to dress for the Dramatic
Society musical comedy that was to be performed that evening. He
returned to Norry Parker's room and prepared to put on his Tuxedo.

"You look as if somebody had left you a million dollars," Norry said to
Hugh. "I don't think I ever saw anybody look so happy. You--you shine."

Hugh laughed. "I am happy, Norry, happy as hell. I'm so happy I ache.
Oh, God, Cynthia's wonderful. I'm crazy about her, Norry--plumb crazy."

Norry had known Cynthia for years, and despite his ingenuousness, he had
noticed some of her characteristics.

"I never expected you to fall in love with Cynthia, Hugh," he said in
his gentle way. "I'm awfully surprised."

Hugh was humming a strain from "Say it with Music" while he undressed.
He pulled off his trousers and then turned to Norry, who was sitting on
the bed. "What did you say? You said something, didn't you?"

Norry smiled. For some quite inexplicable reason, he suddenly felt
older than Hugh.

"Yes, I said something. I said that I never expected you to fall in love
with Cynthia."

Hugh paused in taking off his socks. "Why not?" he demanded. "She's
wonderful."

"You're so different."

"How different? We understand each other perfectly. Of course, we only
saw each other for a week when I was down at your place, but we
understood each other from the first. I was crazy about her as soon as I
saw her."

Norry was troubled. "I don't think I can explain exactly," he said
slowly. "Cynthia runs with a fast crowd, and she smokes and drinks--and
you're--well, you're idealistic."

Hugh pulled off his underclothes and laughed as he stuck his feet into
slippers and drew on a bath-robe. "Of course, she does. All the girls do
now. She's just as idealistic as I am."

He wrapped the bath-robe around him and departed for the showers,
singing gaily:


                "Say it with music,
                 Beautiful music;
                 Somehow they'd rather be kissed
                 To the strains of Chopin or Liszt.
                 A melody mellow played on a cello
                 Helps Mister Cupid along--
                 So say it with a beautiful song."


Shortly he returned, still singing the same song, his voice full and
happy. He continued to sing as he dressed, paying no attention to Norry,
completely lost in his own Elysian thoughts.

To Hugh and Cynthia the musical comedy was a complete success, although
the music, written by an undergraduate, was strangely reminiscent of
several recent Broadway song successes, and the plot of the comedy got
lost after the first ten minutes and was never recovered until the last
two. It was amusing to watch men try to act like women, and two of the
"ladies" of the chorus were patently drunk. _Cleopatra_, the leading
lady, was a wrestler and looked it, his biceps swelling magnificently
every time he raised his arms to embrace the comic _Antony_. It was
glorious nonsense badly enough done to be really funny. Hugh and
Cynthia, along with the rest of the audience, laughed joyously--and held
hands.

After the play was over, they returned to the Nu Delta house and danced
until two in the morning. During one dance Cynthia whispered to him,
"Hugh, get me a drink or I'll pass out."

Hugh, forgetting his indignation of the year before, went in search of
Vinton and deprived that young man of a pint of gin without a scruple.
He and Cynthia then sneaked behind the house and did away with the
liquor. Other couples were drinking, all of them surreptitiously,
Leonard Gates having laid down the law in no uncertain manner, and all
of the brothers were a little afraid of Gates.

Cynthia slept until noon the next day, and Hugh went to his classes. In
the afternoon they attended a baseball game, and then returned to the
fraternity house for another tea-dance. The Prom was to be that night.
Hugh assured Cynthia that it was going to be a "wet party," and that
Vinton had sold him a good supply of Scotch.

The campus was rife with stories: this was the wettest Prom on record,
the girls were drinking as much as the men, some of the fraternities had
made the sky the limit, the dormitories were being invaded by couples in
the small hours of the night, and so on. Hugh heard numerous stories but
paid no attention to them. He was supremely happy, and that was all that
mattered. True, several men had advised him to bring plenty of liquor
along to the Prom if he wanted to have a good time, and he was careful
to act on their advice, especially as Cynthia had assured him that she
would dance until doomsday if he kept her "well oiled with hooch."

The gymnasium was gaily decorated for the Prom, the walls hidden with
greenery, the rafters twined with the college colors and almost lost
behind hundreds of small Japanese lanterns. The fraternity booths were
made of fir boughs, and the orchestra platform in the middle of the
floor looked like a small forest of saplings.

The girls were beautiful in the soft glow of the lanterns, their arms
and shoulders smooth and white; the men were trim and neat in their
Tuxedos, the dark suits emphasizing the brilliant colors of the girls'
gowns.

It was soon apparent that some of the couples had got at least half
"oiled" before the dance began, and before an hour had passed many more
couples gave evidence of imbibing more freely than wisely. Occasionally
a hysterical laugh burst shrilly above the pounding of the drums and the
moaning of the saxophones. A couple would stagger awkwardly against
another couple and then continue unevenly on an uncertain way.

The stags seemed to be the worst offenders. Many of them were joyously
drunk, dashing dizzily across the floor to find a partner, and once
having taken her from a friend, dragging her about, happily unconscious
of anything but the girl and the insistent rhythm of the music.

The musicians played as if in a frenzy, the drums pound-pounding a
terrible tom-tom, the saxophones moaning and wailing, the violins
singing sensuously, shrilly as if in pain, an exquisite searing pain.

Boom, boom, boom, boom. "Stumbling all around, stumbling all around,
stumbling all around so funny--" Close-packed the couples moved slowly
about the gymnasium, body pressed tight to body, swaying in place--boom,
boom, boom, boom--"Stumbling here and there, stumbling everywhere--"
Six dowagers, the chaperons, sat in a corner, gossiped, and idly watched
the young couples.... A man suddenly released his girl and raced
clumsily for the door, one hand pressed to his mouth, the other
stretched uncertainly in front of him.

Always the drums beating their terrible tom-tom, their primitive,
blood-maddening tom-tom.... Boom, boom, boom, boom--"I like it just a
little bit, just a little bit, quite a little bit." The music ceased,
and some of the couples disentangled themselves; others waited in frank
embrace for the orchestra to begin the encore.... A boy slumped in a
chair, his head in his hands. His partner sought two friends. They
helped the boy out of the gymnasium.

The orchestra leader lifted his bow. The stags waited in a broken line,
looking for certain girls. The music began, turning a song with comic
words into something weirdly sensuous--strange syncopations, uneven,
startling drum-beats--a mad tom-tom. The couples pressed close together
again, swaying, barely moving in place--boom, boom, boom,
boom--"Second-hand hats, second-hand clothes--That's why they call me
second-hand Rose...." The saxophones sang the melody with passionate
despair; the violins played tricks with a broken heart; the clarinets
rose shrill in pain; the drums beat on--boom, boom, boom, boom.... A
boy and girl sought a dark corner. He shielded her with his body while
she took a drink from a flask. Then he turned his face to the corner and
drank. A moment later they were back on the floor, holding each other
tight, drunkenly swaying... Finally the last strains, a wall of
agony--"Ev-'ry one knows that I'm just Sec-ond-hand Rose--from Sec-ond
Av-en-ue."

The couples moved slowly off the floor, the pounding of the drums still
in their ears and in their blood; some of them sought the fraternity
booths; some of the girls retired to their dressing-room, perhaps to
have another drink; many of the men went outside for a smoke and to tip
a flask upward. Through the noise, the sex-madness, the half-drunken
dancers, moved men and women quite sober, the men vainly trying to
shield the women from contact with any one who was drunk. There was an
angry light in those men's eyes, but most of them said nothing, merely
kept close to their partners, ready to defend them from any too
assertive friend.

Again the music, again the tom-tom of the drums. On and on for hours. A
man "passed out cold" and had to be carried from the gymnasium. A girl
got a "laughing jag" and shrieked with idiotic laughter until her
partner managed to lead her protesting off the floor. On and on, the
constant rhythmic wailing of the fiddles, syncopated passion screaming
with lust, the drums, horribly primitive; drunken embraces.... "Oh,
those Wabash Blues--I know I got my dues--A lone-some soul am I--I feel
that I could die..." Blues, sobbing, despairing blues.... Orgiastic
music--beautiful, hideous! "Can-dle light that gleams--Haunts me in my
dreams..." The drums boom, boom, boom, booming--"I'll pack my walking
shoes, to lose--those Wa-bash Blues..."

Hour after hour--on and on. Flushed faces, breaths hot with passion and
whisky.... Pretty girls, cool and sober, dancing with men who held them
with drunken lasciviousness; sober men hating the whisky breaths of the
girls.... On and on, the drunken carnival to maddening music--the
passion, the lust.

Both Hugh and Cynthia were drinking, and by midnight both of them were
drunk, too drunk any longer to think clearly. As they danced, Hugh was
aware of nothing but Cynthia's body, her firm young body close to his.
His blood beat with the pounding of the drums. He held her tighter and
tighter--the gymnasium, the other couples, a swaying mist before his
eyes.

When the dance ended, Cynthia whispered huskily, "Ta-take me somewhere,
Hugh."

Strangely enough, he got the significance of her words at once. His
blood raced, and he staggered so crazily that Cynthia had to hold him by
the arm.

"Sure--sure; I'll--I'll ta-take you some-somewhere. I--I, too,
Cyntheea."

They walked unevenly out of the gymnasium, down the steps, and through
the crowd of smokers standing outside. Hardly aware of what he was
doing, Hugh led Cynthia to Keller Hall, which was not more than fifty
yards distant.

He took a flask out of his pocket. "Jush one more drink," he said
thickly and emptied the bottle. Then, holding Cynthia desperately by the
arm, he opened the door of Keller Hall and stumbled with her up the
stairs to Norry Parker's room. Fortunately the hallways were deserted,
and no one saw them. The door was unlocked, and Hugh, after searching
blindly for the switch, finally clicked on the lights and mechanically
closed the door behind him.

He was very dizzy. He wanted another drink--and he wanted Cynthia. He
put his arms around her and pulled her drunkenly to him. The door of one
of the bedrooms opened, and Norry Parker stood watching them. He had
spent the evening at the home of a musical professor and had returned to
his room only a few minutes before. His face went white when he saw the
embracing couple.

"Hugh!" he said sharply.

Hugh and Cynthia, still clinging to each other, looked at him. Slowly
Cynthia took her arms from around Hugh's neck and forced herself from
his embrace. Norry disappeared into his room and came out a minute later
with his coat on; he had just begun to undress when he had heard a noise
in the study.

"I'll see you home, Cynthia," he said quietly. He took her arm and led
her out of the room--and locked the door behind him. Hugh stared at them
blankly, swaying slightly, completely befuddled. Cynthia went with Norry
willingly enough, leaning heavily on his arm and occasionally sniffing.

When he returned to his room, Hugh was sitting on the floor staring at a
photograph of Norry's mother. He had been staring at it for ten minutes,
holding it first at arm's length and then drawing it closer and closer
to him. No matter where he held it, he could not see what it was--and he
was determined to see it.

Norry walked up to him and reached for the photograph.

"Give me that," he said curtly. "Take your hands on my mother's
picture."

"It's not," Hugh exclaimed angrily; "it's not. It's my musher, my own
mu-musher--my, my own dear musher. Oh, oh!"

He slumped down in a heap and began to sob bitterly, muttering, "Musher,
musher, musher."

Norry was angry. The whole scene was revolting to him. His best friend
was a disgusting sight, apparently not much better than a gibbering
idiot. And Hugh had shamefully abused his hospitality. Norry was no
longer gentle and boyish; he was bitterly disillusioned.

"Get up," he said briefly. "Get up and go to bed."

"Tha's my musher. You said it wasn't my--my musher." Hugh looked up, his
face wet with maudlin tears.

Norry leaned over and snatched the picture from him. "Take your dirty
hands off of that," he snapped. "Get up and go to bed."

"Tha's my musher." Hugh was gently persistent.

"It's not your mother. You make me sick. Go to bed." Norry tugged at
Hugh's arm impotently; Hugh simply sat limp, a dead weight.

Norry's gray eyes narrowed. He took a glass, filled it with cold water
in the bedroom, and then deliberately dashed the water into Hugh's face.

Then he repeated the performance.

Hugh shook his head and rubbed his hands wonderingly over his face. "I'm
no good," he said almost clearly. "I'm no good."

"You certainly aren't. Come on; get up and go to bed." Again Norry
tugged at his arm, and this time Hugh, clinging clumsily to the edge of
the table by which he was sitting, staggered to his feet.

"I'm a blot," he declared mournfully; "I'm no good, Norry. I'm an--an
excreeshence, an ex-cree-shence, tha's what I am."

"Something of the sort," Norry agreed in disgust. "Here, let me take off
your coat."

"Leave my coat alone." He pulled himself away from Norry. "I'm no good.
I'm an ex-cree-shence. I'm goin' t' commit suicide; tha's what I'm goin'
t' do. Nobody'll care 'cept my musher, and she wouldn't either if she
knew me. Oh, oh, I wish I didn't use a shafety-razor. I'll tell you what
to do, Norry." He clung pleadingly to Norry's arm and begged with
passionate intensity. "You go over to Harry King's room. He's got a
re-re--a pistol. You get it for me and I'll put it right here--" he
touched his temple awkwardly--"and I'll--I'll blow my damn brains out.
I'm a blot, Norry; I'm an ex-cree-shence."

Norry shook him. "Shut up. You've got to go to bed. You're drunk."

"I'm sick. I'm an ex-cree-shence." The room was whizzing rapidly around
Hugh, and he clung hysterically to Norry. Finally he permitted himself
to be led into the bedroom and undressed, still moaning that he was an
"ex-cree-shence."

The bed pitched. He lay on his right side, clutching the covers in
terror. He turned over on his back. Still the bed swung up and down
sickeningly. Then he twisted over to his left side, and the bed
suddenly swung into rest, almost stable. In a few minutes he was sound
asleep.

He cut chapel and his two classes the next morning, one at nine and the
other at ten o'clock; in fact, it was nearly eleven when he awoke. His
head was splitting with pain, his tongue was furry, and his mouth tasted
like bilge-water. He made wry faces, passed his thick tongue around his
dry mouth--oh, so damnably dry!--and pressed the palms of his hands to
his pounding temples. He craved a drink of cold water, but he was afraid
to get out of bed. He felt pathetically weak and dizzy.

Norry walked into the room and stood quietly looking at him.

"Get me a drink, Norry, please," Hugh begged.

"I'm parched." He rolled over. "Ouch! God, how my head aches!"

Norry brought him the drink, but nothing less than three glasses even
began to satisfy Hugh. Then, still saying nothing, Norry put a cold
compress on Hugh's hot forehead.

"Thanks, Norry old man. That's awfully damn good of you."

Norry walked out of the room, and Hugh quickly fell into a light sleep.
An hour later he woke up, quite unaware of the fact that Norry had
changed the cold compress three times. The nap had refreshed him. He
still felt weak and faint; but his head no longer throbbed, and his
throat was less dry.

"Norry," he called feebly.

"Yes?" Norry stood in the doorway. "Feeling better?"

"Yes, some. Come sit down on the bed. I want to talk to you. But get me
another drink first, please. My mouth tastes like burnt rubber."

Norry gave him the drink and then sat down on the edge of the bed,
silently waiting.

"I'm awfully ashamed of myself, old man," Hugh began. "I--I don't know
what to say. I can't remember much what happened. I remember bringing
Cynthia up here and you coming in and then--well, I somehow can't
remember anything after that. What did you do?"

"I took Cynthia home and then came back and put you to bed." Norry gazed
at the floor and spoke softly.

"You took Cynthia home?"

"Of course."

Hugh stared at him in awe. "But if you'd been seen with her in the dorm,
you'd have been fired from college."

"Nobody saw us. It's all right."

Hugh wanted to cry. "Oh, Lord, Norry, you're white," he exclaimed. "The
whitest fellow that ever lived. You took that chance for me."

"That's all right." Norry was painfully embarrassed.

"And I'm such a rotter. You--you know what we came up here for?"

"I can guess." Norry's glance still rested on the floor. He spoke hardly
above a whisper.

"Nothing happened. I swear it, Norry. I meant to--but--but you
came--thank God! I was awfully soused. I guess you think I'm rotten,
Norry. I suppose I am. I don't know how I could treat you this way. Are
you awfully angry?"

"I was last night," Norry replied honestly, "but I'm not this morning.
I'm just terribly disappointed. I understand, I guess; I'm human,
too--but I'm disappointed. I can't forget the way you looked."

"Don't!" Hugh cried. "Please don't, Norry. I--I can't stand it if you
talk that way. I'm so damned ashamed. Please forgive me."

Norry was very near to tears. "Of course, I forgive you," he whispered,
"but I hope you won't do it again."

"I won't, Norry. I promise you. Oh, God, I'm no good. That's twice I've
been stopped by an accident. I'll go straight now, though; I promise
you."

Norry stood up. "It's nearly noon," he said more naturally. "Cynthia
will be wondering where you are."

"Cynthia! Oh, Norry, how can I face her?"

"You've got to," said the young moralist firmly.

"I suppose so," the sinner agreed, his voice miserably lugubrious.
"God!"

After three cups of coffee, however, the task did not seem so
impossible. Hugh entered the Nu Delta house with a fairly jaunty air and
greeted the men and women easily enough. His heart skipped a beat when
he saw Cynthia standing in the far corner of the living-room. She was
wearing her scarlet hat and blue suit.

She saved him the embarrassment of opening the conversation. "Come into
the library," she said softly. "I want to speak to you."

Wondering and rather frightened, he followed her.

"I'm going home this afternoon," she began. "I've got everything packed,
and I've told everybody that I don't feel very well."

"You aren't sick?" he asked, really worried.

"Of course not, but I had to say something. The train leaves in an hour
or two, and I want to have a talk with you before I go."

"But hang it, Cynthia, think of what you're missing. There's a baseball
game with Raleigh this afternoon, a tea-dance in the Union after that,
the Musical Clubs concert this evening--I sing with the Glee club and
Norry's going to play a solo, and I'm in the Banjo Club, too--and we are
going to have a farewell dance at the house after the concert." Hugh
pleaded earnestly; but somehow down in his heart he wished that she
wouldn't stay.

"I know, but I've got to go. Let's go somewhere out in the woods where
we can talk without being disturbed."

Still protesting, he led her out of the house, across the campus, past
the lake, and into the woods. Finally they sat down on a smooth rock.

"I'm awfully sorry to bust up your party, Hugh," Cynthia began slowly,
"but I've been doing some thinking, and I've just got to beat it." She
paused a moment and then looked him square in the eyes. "Do you love
me?"

For an instant Hugh's eyes dropped, and then he looked up and lied like
a gentleman. "Yes," he said simply; "I love you, Cynthia."

She smiled almost wearily and shook her head. "You _are_ a good egg,
Hugh. It was white of you to say that, but I know that you don't love
me. You did yesterday, but you don't now. Do you realize that you
haven't asked to kiss me to-day?"

Hugh flushed and stammered: "I--I've got an awful hang-over, Cynthia. I
feel rotten."

"Yes, I know, but that isn't why you didn't want to kiss me. I know all
about it. Listen, Hugh." She faced him bravely. "I've been running with
a fast crowd for three years, and I've learned a lot about fellows; and
most of 'em that I've known weren't your kind. How old are you?"

"Twenty-one in a couple of months."

"I'm twenty and lots wiser about some things than you are. I've been
crazy about you--I guess I am kinda yet--and I know that you thought you
were in love with me. I wanted you to have hold of me all the time.
That's all that mattered. It was--was your body, Hugh. You're sweet and
fine, and I respect you, but I'm not the kid for you to run around with.
I'm too fast. I woke up early this morning, and I've done a lot of
thinking since. You know what we came near doing last night? Well,
that's all we want each other for. We're not in love."

A phrase from the bull sessions rushed into Hugh's mind. "You mean--sex
attraction?" he asked in some embarrassment. He felt weak and tired. He
seemed to be listening to Cynthia in a dream. Nothing was real--and
everything was a little sad.

"Yes, that's it--and, oh, Hugh, somehow I don't want that with you.
We're not the same kind at all. I used to think that when I got your
letters. Sometimes I hardly understood them, but I'd close my eyes and
see you so strong and blond and clean, and I'd imagine you were holding
me tight--and--and then I was happy. I guess I did kinda love you, but
we've spoiled it." She wanted desperately to cry but bit her lip and
held back her tears.

"I think I know what you mean, Cynthia," Hugh said softly. "I don't know
much about love and sex attraction and that sort of thing, but I know
that I was happier kissing you than I've ever been in my life. I--I wish
that last night hadn't happened. I hate myself."

"You needn't. It was more my fault than yours. I'm a pretty bad egg, I
guess; and the booze and you holding me was too much. I hate myself,
too. I've spoiled the nicest thing that ever happened to me." She looked
up at him, her eyes bright with tears. "I _did_ love you, Hugh. I loved
you as much as I could love any one."

Hugh put his arms around her and drew her to him. Then he bent his head
and kissed her gently. There was no passion in his embrace, but there
was infinite tenderness. He felt spiritually and physically weak, as if
all his emotional resources had been quite spent.

"I think that I love you more than I ever did before," he whispered.

If he had shown any passion, if there had been any warmth in his kiss,
Cynthia might have believed him, but she was aware only of his
gentleness. She pushed him back and drew out of his arms.

"No," she said sharply; "you don't love me. You're just sorry for
me.... You're just kind."

Hugh had read "Marpessa" many times, and a line from it came to make her
attitude clear:


                                "thou wouldst grow kind;
                 Most bitter to a woman that was loved."


"Oh, I don't know; I don't know," he said miserably. "Let's not call
everything off now, Cynthia. Let's wait a while."

"No!" She stood up decisively. "No. I hate loose ends." She glanced at
her tiny wrist-watch. "If I'm going to make that train, I've got to
hurry. We've got barely half an hour. Come, Hugh. Be a sport."

He stood up, his face white and weary, his blue eyes dull and sad.

"Just as you say, Cynthia," he said slowly. "But I'm going to miss you
like hell."

She did not reply but started silently for the path. He followed her,
and they walked back to the fraternity house without saying a word, both
busy with unhappy thoughts.

When they reached the fraternity, she got her suit-case, handed it to
him, declined his offer of a taxi, and walked unhappily by his side down
the hill that they had climbed so gaily two days before. Hugh had just
time to get her ticket before the train started.

She paused a moment at the car steps and held out her hand. "Good-by,
Hugh," she said softly, her lips trembling, her eyes full of tears.

"Good-by, Cynthia," he whispered. And then, foolishly, "Thanks for
coming."

She did not smile but drew her hand from his and mounted the steps. An
instant later she was inside the car and the train was moving.

Numbed and miserable, Hugh slowly climbed the hill and wandered back to
Norry Parker's room. He was glad that Norry wasn't there. He paced up
and down the room a few minutes trying to think. Then he threw himself
despairingly on a couch, face down. He wanted to cry; he had never
wanted so much to cry--and he couldn't. There were no tears--and he had
lost something very precious. He thought it was love; it was only his
dreams.




CHAPTER XXIII


For several days Hugh was tortured by doubt and indecision: there were
times when he thought that he loved Cynthia, times when he was sure that
he didn't; when he had just about made up his mind that he hated her, he
found himself planning to follow her to New Rochelle; he tried to
persuade himself that his conduct was no more reprehensible than that of
his comrades, but shame invariably overwhelmed his arguments; there were
hours when he ached for Cynthia, and hours when he loathed her for
smashing something that had been beautiful. Most of all, he wanted
comfort, advice, but he knew no one to whom he was willing to give his
confidence. Somehow, he couldn't admit his drunkenness to any one whose
advice he valued. He called on Professor Henley twice, intending to make
a clean breast of his transgressions. Henley, he knew, would not lecture
him, but when he found himself facing him, he could not bring himself to
confession; he was afraid of losing Henley's respect.

Finally, in desperation, he talked to Norry, not because he thought
Norry could help him but because he had to talk to somebody and Norry
already knew the worst. They went walking far out into the country, idly
discussing campus gossip or pausing to revel in the beauty of the night,
the clear, clean sky, the pale moon, the fireflies sparkling suddenly
over the meadows or even to the tree-tops. Weary from their long walk,
they sat down on a stump, and Hugh let the dam of his emotion break.

"Norry," he began intensely, "I'm in hell--in hell. It's a week since
Prom, and I haven't had a line from Cynthia. I haven't dared write to
her."

"Why not?"

"She--she--oh, damn it!--she told me before she left that everything was
all off. That's why she left early. She said that we didn't love each
other, that all we felt was sex attraction. I don't know whether she's
right or not, but I miss her like the devil. I--I feel empty, sort of
hollow inside, as if everything had suddenly been poured out of me--and
there's nothing to take its place. I was full of Cynthia, you see, and
now there's no Cynthia. There's nothing left but--oh, God, Norry, I'm
ashamed of myself. I feel--dirty." The last word was hardly audible.

Norry touched his arm. "I know, Hugh, and I'm awfully sorry. I think,
though, that Cynthia was right. I know her better than you do. She's an
awfully good kid but not your kind at all; I think I feel as badly
almost as you do about it." He paused a moment and then said simply, "I
was so proud of you, Hugh."

"Don't!" Hugh exclaimed. "I want to kill myself when you say things like
that."

"You don't understand. I know that you don't understand. I've been doing
a lot of thinking since Prom, too. I've thought over a lot of things
that you've said to me--about me, I mean. Why, Hugh, you think I'm not
human. I don't believe you think I have passions like the rest of you.
Well, I do, and sometimes it's--it's awful. I'm telling you that so
you'll understand that I know how you feel. But love's beautiful to me,
Hugh, the most wonderful thing in the world. I was in love with a girl
once--and I know. She didn't give a hang for me; she thought I was a
baby. I suffered awfully; but I know that my love was beautiful, as
beautiful as--" He looked around for a simile--"as to-night. I think
it's because of that that I hate mugging and petting and that sort of
thing. I don't want beauty debased. I want to fight when orchestras jazz
famous arias. Well, petting is jazzing love; and I hate it. Do you see
what I mean?"

Hugh looked at him wonderingly. He didn't know this Norry at all. "Yes,"
he said slowly; "yes, I see what you mean; I think I do, anyway. But
what has it to do with me?"

"Well, I know most of the fellows pet and all that sort of thing, and
they don't think anything about it. But you're different; you love
beautiful things as much as I do. You told me yourself that Jimmie
Henley said last year that you were gifted. You can write and sing and
run, but I've just realized that you aren't proud of those things at
all; you just take them for granted. And you're ashamed that you write
poetry. Some of your poems are good, but you haven't sent any of them to
the poetry magazine. You don't want anybody to know that you write
poetry. You're trying to make yourself like fellows that are inferior to
you." Norry was piteously in earnest. His hero had crumbled into clay
before his eyes, and he was trying to patch him together again
preparatory to boosting him back upon his pedestal.

"Oh, cripes, Norry," Hugh said a little impatiently, "you exaggerate all
my virtues; you always have. I'm not half the fellow you think I am. I
do love beautiful things, but I don't believe my poetry is any good." He
paused a moment and then confessed mournfully: "I'll admit, though, that
I have been going downhill. I'm going to do better from now on. You
watch me."

They talked for hours, Norry embarrassing Hugh with the frankness of
his admiration. Norry's hero-worship had always embarrassed him, but he
didn't like it when the worshiper began to criticize. He admitted the
justness of the criticism, but it hurt him just the same. Perching on a
pedestal had been uncomfortable but a little thrilling; sitting on the
ground and gazing up at his perch was rather humiliating. The fall had
bruised him; and Norry, with the best intentions in the world, was
kicking the bruises.

Nevertheless, he felt better after the talk, determined to win back
Norry's esteem and his own. He swore off smoking and drinking and stuck
to his oath. He told Vinton that if he brought any more liquor to their
room one of them was going to be carried out, and that he had a hunch
that it would be Vinton. Vinton gazed at him with round eyes and
believed him. After that he did his drinking elsewhere, confiding to his
cronies that Carver was on the wagon and that he had got as religious as
holy hell. "He won't let me drink in my own room," he wailed dolorously.
And then with a sudden burst of clairvoyance, he added, "I guess his
girl has given him the gate."

For weeks the campus buzzed with talk about the Prom. A dozen men who
had been detected _flagrante delicto_ were summarily expelled. Many
others who had been equally guilty were in a constant state of mental
goose-flesh. Would the next mail bring a summons from the dean?
President Culver spoke sternly in chapel and hinted that there would be
no Prom the coming year. Most of the men said that the Prom had been an
"awful brawl," but there were some who insisted that it was no worse
than the Proms held at other colleges, and recited startling tales in
support of their argument.

Leonard Gates finally settled the whole matter for Hugh. There had been
many discussions in the Nu Delta living-room about the Prom, and in one
of them Gates ended the argument with a sane and thoughtful statement.

"The Prom was a brawl," he said seriously, "a drunken brawl. We all
admit that. The fact that Proms at other colleges are brawls, too,
doesn't make ours any more respectable. If a Yale man happens to commit
murder and gets away with it, that is no reason that a Harvard man or a
Sanford man should commit murder, too. Some of you are arguing like
babies. But some of you are going to the other extreme.

"You talk as if everybody at the Prom was lit. Well, I wasn't lit, and
as a matter of fact most of them weren't lit. Just use a little common
sense. There were three hundred and fifty couples at the Prom. Now, not
half of them even had a drink. Say that half did. That makes one hundred
and seventy-five fellows. If fifty of those fellows were really soused,
I'll eat my hat, but we'll say that there were fifty. Fifty were quite
enough to make the whole Prom look like a longshoreman's ball. You've
got to take the music into consideration, too. That orchestra could
certainly play jazz; it could play it too damn well. Why, that music was
enough to make a saint shed his halo and shake a shimmy.

"What I'm getting to is this: there are over a thousand fellows in
college, and out of that thousand not more than fifty were really soused
at the Prom, and not more than a hundred and seventy-five were even a
little teed. To go around saying that Sanford men are a lot of muckers
just because a small fraction of them acted like gutter-pups is sheer
bunk. The Prom was a drunken brawl, but all Sanford men aren't
drunkards--not by a damn sight."

Hugh had to admit the force of Gates's reasoning, and he found comfort
in it. He had been just about ready to believe that all college men and
Sanford men in particular were hardly better than common muckers. But in
the end the comfort that he got was small: he realized bitterly that he
was one of the minority that had disgraced his college; he was one of
the gutter-pups. The recognition of that undeniable fact cut deep.

He was determined to redeem himself; he _had_ to, somehow. Living a life
of perfect rectitude was not enough; he had to do something that would
win back his own respect and the respect of his fellows, which he
thought, quite absurdly, that he had forfeited. So far as he could see,
there was only one way that he could justify his existence at Sanford;
that was to win one of the dashes in the Sanford-Raleigh meet. He clung
to that idea with the tenacity of a fanatic.

He had nearly a month in which to train, and train he did as he never
had before. His diet became a matter of the utmost importance; a
rub-down was a holy rite, and the words of Jansen, the coach, divine
gospel. He placed in both of the preliminary meets, but he knew that he
could do better; he wasn't yet in condition.

When the day for the Raleigh-Sanford meet finally came, he did not feel
any of the nervousness that had spelled defeat for him in his freshman
year. He was stonily calm, silently determined. He was going to place in
the hundred and win the two-twenty or die in the attempt. No golden
dreams of breaking records excited him. Calvert of Raleigh was running
the hundred consistently in ten seconds and had been credited with
better time. Hugh had no hopes of defeating him in the hundred, but
there was a chance in the two-twenty. Calvert was a short-distance man,
the shorter the better. Two hundred and twenty yards was a little too
far for him.

Calvert did not look like a runner. He was a good two inches shorter
than Hugh, who lacked nearly that much of six feet. Calvert was heavily
built--a dark, brawny chap, both quick and powerful. Hugh looked at him
and for a moment hated him. Although he did not phrase it so--in fact,
he did not phrase it at all--Calvert was his obstacle in his race for
redemption.

Calvert won the hundred-yard dash in ten seconds flat, breaking the
Sanford-Raleigh record. Hugh, running faster than he ever had in his
life, barely managed to come in second ahead of his team-mate Murphy.
The Sanford men cheered him lustily, but he hardly listened. He _had_ to
win the two-twenty.

At last the runners were called to the starting-line. They danced up and
down the track flexing their muscles. Hugh was tense but more determined
than nervous. Calvert pranced around easily; he seemed entirely
recovered from his great effort in the hundred. Finally the starter
called them to their marks. They tried their spikes in the
starting-holes, scraped them out a bit more, made a few trial dashes,
and finally knelt in line at the command of the starter.

Hugh expected Calvert to lead for the first hundred yards; but the last
hundred, that was where Calvert would weaken. Calvert was sure to be
ahead at the beginning--but after that!

"On your marks.

"Set."

The pistol cracked. The start was perfect; the five men leaped forward
almost exactly together. For once Calvert had not beaten the others off
the mark, but he immediately drew ahead. He was running powerfully, his
legs rising and falling in exact rhythm, his spikes tearing into the
cinder path. But Hugh and Murphy were pressing him close. At the end of
the first hundred Calvert led by a yard. Hugh pounded on, Murphy falling
behind him. The others were hopelessly outclassed. Hugh did not think;
he did not hear a thousand men shouting hysterically, "Carver! Carver!"
He saw nothing but Calvert a yard ahead of him. He knew nothing but that
he had to make up that yard. Down the track they sped, their breath
bursting from them, their hands clenched, their faces grotesquely
distorted, their legs driving them splendidly on.

Hugh was gaining; that yard was closing. He sensed it rather than saw
it. He saw nothing now, not even Calvert. Blinded with effort, his lungs
aching, his heart pounding terribly, he fought on, mechanically keeping
between the two white lines. Ten yards from the tape he was almost
abreast of Calvert. He saw the tape through a red haze; he made a final
valiant leap for it--but he never touched it: Calvert's chest had
broken it a tiny fraction of a second before.

Hugh almost collapsed after the race. Two men caught him and carried
him, despite his protests, to the dressing-room. At first he was aware
only of his overwhelming weariness. Something very important had
happened. It was over, and he was tired, infinitely tired. A rub-down
refreshed his muscles, but his spirit remained weary. For a month he had
thought of nothing but that race--even Cynthia had become strangely
insignificant in comparison with it--and now that the race had been run
and lost, his whole spirit sagged and drooped.

He was pounded on the back; his hand was grasped and shaken until it
ached; he was cheered to an echo by the thrilled Sanford men; but still
his depression remained. He had won his letter, he had run a magnificent
race, all Sanford sang his praise--Norry Parker had actually cried with
excitement and delight--but he felt that he had failed; he had not
justified himself.

A few days later he entered Henley's office, intending to make only a
brief visit. Henley congratulated him. "You were wonderful, Hugh," he
said enthusiastically. "The way that you crawled up on him the last
hundred yards was thrilling. I shouted until I was hoarse. I never saw
any one fight more gamely. He's a faster man than you are, but you
almost beat him. I congratulate you--excuse the word, please--on your
guts."

Somehow Hugh couldn't stand Henley's enthusiasm. Suddenly he blurted out
the whole story, his drunkenness at the Prom, his split with Cynthia--he
did not mention the visit to Norry's room--his determination to redeem
himself, his feeling that if he had won that race he would at least have
justified his existence at the college, and, finally, his sense of
failure.

Henley listened sympathetically, amused and touched by the boy's naive
philosophy. He did not tell him that the race was relatively
unimportant--he was sure that Hugh would find that out for himself--but
he did bring him comfort.

"You did not fail, Hugh," he said gently; "you succeeded magnificently.
As for serving your college, you can always serve it best by being
yourself, being true to yourself, I mean, and that means being the very
fine gentleman that you are." He paused a minute, aware that he must be
less personal; Hugh was red to the hair and gazing unhappily at the
floor.

"You must read Browning," he went on, "and learn about his
success-in-failure philosophy. He maintains that it is better to strive
for a million and miss it than to strive for a hundred and get it. 'A
man's reach should exceed his grasp or what's a heaven for?' He says it
in a dozen different ways. It's the man who tries bravely for something
beyond his power that gets somewhere, the man who really succeeds. Well,
you tried for something beyond your power--to beat Calvert, a really
great runner. You tried to your utmost; therefore, you succeeded. I
admire your sense of failure; it means that you recognize an ideal. But
I think that you succeeded. You may not have quite justified yourself to
yourself, but you have proved capable of enduring a hard test bravely.
You have no reason to be depressed, no reason to be ashamed."

They talked for a long time, and finally Henley confessed that he
thought Cynthia had been wise in taking herself out of Hugh's life.

"I can see," he said, "that you aren't telling me quite all the story. I
don't want you to, either. I judge, however, from what you have said
that you went somewhere with her and that only complete drunkenness
saved you from disgracing both yourself and her. You need no lecture, I
am sure; you are sufficiently contrite. I have a feeling that she was
right about sexual attraction being paramount; and I think that she is a
very brave girl. I like the way she went home, and I like the way she
has kept silent. Not many girls could or would do that. It takes
courage. From what you have said, however, I imagine that she is not
your kind; at least, that she isn't the kind that is good for you. You
have suffered and are suffering, I know, but I am sure that some day you
are going to be very grateful to that girl--for a good many reasons."

Hugh felt better after that talk, and the end of the term brought him a
surprise that wiped out his depression and his sense of failure. He
found, too, that his pain was growing less; the wound was healing.
Perversely, he hated it for healing, and he poked it viciously to feel
it throb. Agony had become sweet. It made life more intense, less
beautiful, perhaps, but more wonderful, more real. Romantically, too, he
felt that he must be true both to his love and to his sorrow, and his
love was fading into a memory that was plaintively gray but shot with
scarlet thrills--and his sorrow was bowing before the relentless
excitement of his daily life.

The surprise that rehabilitated him in his own respect was his election
to the Boule, the senior council and governing board of the student
body. It was the greatest honor that an undergraduate could receive, and
Hugh had in no way expected it. When Nu Delta had first suggested to him
that he be a candidate, he had demurred, saying that there were other
men in his delegation better fitted to serve and with better chances of
election. Leonard Gates, however, felt otherwise; and before Hugh knew
what had happened he was a candidate along with thirty other juniors,
only twelve of whom could be elected.

He took no part in the campaigning, attended none of the caucuses, was
hardly interested in the fraternity "combine" that promised to elect
him. He did not believe that he could be elected; he saw no reason why
he should be. As a matter of fact, as Gates and others well knew, his
chances were more than good. Hugh was popular in his own right, and his
great race in the Sanford-Raleigh meet had made him something of a hero
for the time being. Furthermore, he was a member of both the Glee and
Banjo Clubs, he had led his class in the spring sings for three years,
and he had a respectable record in his studies.

The tapping took place in chapel the last week of classes. After the
first hymn, the retiring members of the Boule rose and marched down the
aisle to where the juniors were sitting. The new members were tapped in
the order of the number of votes that they had received, and the first
man tapped, having received the largest number of votes, automatically
became president of the Boule for the coming year.

Hugh's interest naturally picked up the day of the election, and he
began to have faint hopes that he would be the tenth or eleventh man. To
his enormous surprise he was tapped third, and he marched down the
aisle to the front seat reserved for the new members with the applause
of his fellows sweet in his ears. It didn't seem possible; he was one of
the most popular and most respected men in his class. He could not
understand it, but he didn't particularly care to understand it; the
honor was enough.

Nu Delta tried to heap further honors on him, but he declined them. As a
member of Boule he was naturally nominated for the presidency of the
chapter. Quite properly, he felt that he was not fitted for such a
position; and he retired in favor of John Lawrence, the only man in his
delegation really capable of controlling the brothers. Lawrence was a
man like Gates. He would, Hugh knew, carry on the constructive work that
Gates had so splendidly started. Nu Delta was in the throes of one of
those changes so characteristic of fraternities.




CHAPTER XXIV


Hugh spent his last college vacation at home, working on the farm,
reading, occasionally dancing at Corley Lake, and thinking a great deal.
He saw Janet Harton, now Janet Moffitt, several times at the lake and
wondered how he could ever have adored her. She was still childlike,
still dainty and pretty, but to Hugh she was merely a talking doll, and
he felt a little sorry for her burly, rather stupid husband who lumbered
about after her like a protecting watch-dog.

He met plenty of pretty girls at the lake, but, as he said, he was "off
women for good." He was afraid of them; he had been severely burnt, and
while the fire still fascinated him, it frightened him, too. Women, he
was sure, were shallow creatures, dangerous to a man's peace of mind and
self-respect. They were all right to dance with and pet a bit; but that
was all, absolutely all.

He thought a lot about girls that summer and even more about his life
after graduation from college. What was he going to do? Life stretched
ahead of him for one year like a smooth, flowered plain--and then the
abyss. He felt prepared to do nothing at all, and he was not swept by an
overpowering desire to do anything in particular. Writing had the
greatest appeal for him, but he doubted his ability. Teach? Perhaps. But
teaching meant graduate work. Well, he would see what the next year at
college would show. He was going to take a course in composition with
Professor Henley, and if Henley thought his gifts warranted it, he would
ask his father for a year or two of graduate work at Harvard.

College was pleasant that last year. It was pleasant to wear a blue
sweater with an orange S on it; it was pleasant, too, to wear a small
white hat that had a blue B on the crown, the insignia of the Boule and
a sign that he was a person to be respected and obeyed; it was pleasant
to be spoken to by the professors as one who had reached something
approaching manhood; life generally was pleasant, not so exciting as the
three preceding years but fuller and richer. Early in the first term he
was elected to Helmer, an honor society that possessed a granite "tomb,"
a small windowless building in which the members were supposed to
discuss questions of great importance and practice secret rites of
awe-inspiring wonder. As a matter of fact, the monthly meetings were
nothing but "bull fests," or as one cynical member put it, "We wear a
gold helmet on our sweaters and chew the fat once a month." True
enough, but that gold helmet glittered enticingly in the eyes of every
student who did not possess one.

For the first time Hugh's studies meant more to him than the
undergraduate life. He had chosen his instructors carefully, having
learned from three years of experience that the instructor was far more
important than the title of the course. He had three classes in
literature, one in music--partly because it was a "snap" and partly
because he really wanted to know more about music--and his composition
course with Henley, to him the most important of the lot.

He really studied, and at the end of the first term received three A's
and two B's, a very creditable record. What was more important than his
record, however, was the fact that he was really enjoying his work; he
was intellectually awakened and hungry for learning.

Also, for the first time he really enjoyed the fraternity. Jack Lawrence
was proving an able president, and Nu Delta pledged a freshman
delegation of which Hugh was genuinely proud. There were plenty of men
in the chapter whom he did not like or toward whom he was indifferent,
but he had learned to ignore them and center his interest in those men
whom he found congenial.

The first term was ideal, but the second became a maelstrom of doubt and
trouble in which he whirled madly around trying to find some philosophy
that would solve his difficulties.

When Norry returned to college after the Christmas vacation, he told
Hugh that he had seen Cynthia. Naturally, Hugh was interested, and the
mere mention of Cynthia's name was still enough to quicken his pulse.

"How did she look?" he asked eagerly.

"Awful."

"What! What's the matter? Is she sick?"

Norry shook his head. "No, I don't think she is exactly sick," he said
gravely, "but something is the matter with her. You know, she has been
going an awful pace, tearing around like crazy. I told you that, I know,
when I came back in the fall. Well, she's kept it up, and I guess she's
about all in. I couldn't understand it. Cynthia's always run with a fast
bunch, but she's never had a bad name. She's beginning to get one now."

"No!" Hugh was honestly troubled. "What's the matter, anyway? Didn't you
try to stop her?"

Norry smiled. "Of course not. Can you imagine me stopping Cynthia from
doing anything she wanted to do? But I did have a talk with her. She got
hold of me one night at the country club and pulled me off in a corner.
She wanted to talk about you."

"Me?" Hugh's heart was beginning to pound. "What did she say?"

"She asked questions. She wanted to know everything about you. I guess
she asked me a thousand questions. She wanted to know how you looked,
how you were doing in your courses, where you were during vacation, if
you had a girl--oh, everything; and finally she asked if you ever talked
about her?"

"What did you say?" Hugh demanded breathlessly.

"I told her yes, of course. Gee, Hugh, I thought she was going to cry.
We talked some more, all about you. She's crazy about you, Hugh; I'm
sure of it. And I think that's why she's been hitting the high spots. I
felt sorry as the devil for her. Poor kid...."

"Gee, that's tough; that's damn tough. Did she send me any message?"

"No. I asked her if she wanted to send her love or anything, and she
said she guessed not. I think she's having an awful time, Hugh."

That talk tore Hugh's peace of mind into quivering shreds. Cynthia was
with him every waking minute, and with her a sense of guilt that would
not down. He knew that if he wrote to her he might involve himself in a
very difficult situation, but the temptation was stronger than his
discretion. He wanted to know if Norry was right, and he knew that he
would never have an hour's real comfort until he found out. Cynthia had
told him that she was not in love with him; she had said definitely
that their attraction for each other was merely sexual. Had she lied to
him? Had she gone home in the middle of Prom, week because she thought
she ought to save him from herself? He couldn't decide, and he felt that
he had to know. If Cynthia was unhappy and he was the cause of her
unhappiness, he wanted, he assured himself, to "do the right thing," and
he had very vague notions indeed of what the right thing might be.

Finally he wrote to her. The letter took him hours to write, but he
flattered himself that it was very discreet; it implied nothing and
demanded nothing.


       Dear Cynthia:

       I had a talk with Norry Parker recently that has
       troubled me a great deal. He said that you seemed both
       unwell and unhappy, and he felt that I was in some way
       responsible for your depression. Of course, we both know
       how ingenuous and romantic Norry is; he can find tragedy
       in a cut finger. I recognize that fact, but what he told
       me has given me no end of worry just the same.

       Won't you please write to me just what is wrong--if
       anything really is and if I have anything to do with it.
       I shall continue to worry until I get your letter.

                                    Most sincerely,
                                                     HUGH.


Weeks went by and no answer came. Hugh's confusion increased. He
thought of writing her another letter, but pride and common sense
forbade. Then her letter came, and all of his props were kicked suddenly
from under him.


         Oh my dear, my dear [she wrote], I swore that I wouldn't
       answer your letter--and here I am doing it. I've fought
       and fought, and fought until I can't fight any longer;
       I've held out as long as I can. Oh, Hugh my dearest, I
       love you. I can't help it--I do, I do. I've tried so
       hard not to--and when I found that I couldn't help it I
       swore that I would never let you know--because I knew
       that you didn't love me and that I am bad for you. I
       thought I loved you enough to give you up--and I might
       have succeeded if you hadn't written to me.

       Oh, Hugh dearest, I nearly fainted when I saw your
       letter. I hardly dared open it--I just looked and looked
       at your beloved handwriting. I cried when I did read it.
       I thought of the letters you used to write to me--and
       this one was so different--so cold and impersonal. It
       hurt me dreadfully.

       I said that I wouldn't answer it--I swore that I
       wouldn't. And then I read your old letters--I've kept
       every one of them--and looked at your picture--and
       to-night you just seemed to be here--I could see your
       sweet smile and feel your dear arms around me--and Hugh,
       my darling, I had to write--I _had_ to.

       My pride is all gone. I can't think any more. You are
       all that matters. Oh, Hugh dearest, I love you so damned
       hard.

                                                CYNTHIA.


Two hours after the letter arrived it was followed by a telegram:


       Don't pay any attention to my letter. I was crazy when I
       wrote it.


Hugh had sense enough to pay no attention to the telegram; he tossed it
into the fireplace and reread the letter. What could he do? What
_should_ he do? He was torn by doubt and confusion. He looked at her
picture, and all his old longing for her returned. But he had learned to
distrust that longing. He had got along for a year without her; he had
almost ceased thinking of her when Norry brought her back to his mind.
He had to answer her letter. What could he say? He paced the floor of
his room, ran his hands through his hair, pounded his forehead; but no
solution came. He took a long walk into the country and came back more
confused than ever. He was flattered by her letter, moved by it; he
tried to persuade himself that he loved her as she loved him--and he
could not do it. His passion for her was no longer overpowering, and no
amount of thinking could make it so. In the end he temporized. His
letter was brief.


       Dear Cynthia:

       There is no need, I guess, to tell you that your letter
       swept me clean off my feet. I am still dizzy with
       confusion. I don't know what to say, and I have decided
       that it is best for me not to say anything until I know
       my own mind. I couldn't be fair either to you or myself
       otherwise. And I want to be fair; I must be.

       Give me time, please. It is because I care so much for
       you that I ask it. Don't worry if you don't hear from me
       for weeks. My silence won't mean that I have forgotten
       you; it will mean that I am thinking of you.

                                Sincerely,
                                                HUGH.


Her answer came promptly:


       Hugh, my dear--

       I was a fish to write that letter--and I know that I'll
       never forgive myself. But I couldn't help it--I just
       couldn't help it. I am glad that you are keeping your
       head because I've lost mine entirely. Take all the time
       you like. Do you hate me for losing my pride? I do.

                                Your stupid
                                                CYNTHIA.


Weeks went by, and Hugh found no solution. He damned college with all
his heart and soul. What good had it done him anyway? Here he was with a
serious problem on his hands and he couldn't solve it any better than he
could have when he was a freshman. Four years of studying and lectures
and examinations, and the first time he bucked up against a bit of life
he was licked.

Eventually he wrote to her and told her that he was fonder of her than
he was of any girl that he had ever known but that he didn't know
whether he was in love with her or not. "I have learned to distrust my
own emotions," he wrote, "and my own decisions. The more I think the
more bewildered I become. I am afraid to ask you to marry me for fear
that I'll wreck both our lives, and I'm afraid not to ask you for the
same reason. Do you think that time will solve our problem? I don't
know. I don't know anything."

She replied that she was willing to wait just so long as they continued
to correspond; she said that she could no longer bear not to hear from
him. So they wrote to each other, and the tangle of their relations
became more hopelessly knotted. Cynthia never sent another letter so
unguarded as her first, but she made no pretense of hiding her love.

As Hugh sank deeper and deeper into the bog of confusion and distress,
his contempt for his college "education" increased. One night in May he
expressed that contempt to a small group of seniors.

"College is bunk," said Hugh sternly, "pure bunk. They tell us that we
learn to think. Rot! I haven't learned to think; a child can solve a
simple human problem as well as I can. College has played hell with me.
I came here four years ago a darned nice kid, if I do say so myself. I
was chock-full of ideals and illusions. Well, college has smashed most
of those ideals and knocked the illusions plumb to hell. I thought, for
example, that all college men were gentlemen; well, most of them aren't.
I thought that all of them were intelligent and hard students."

The group broke into loud laughter. "Me, too," said George Winsor when
the noise had abated. "I thought that I was coming to a regular
educational heaven, halls of learning and all that sort of thing. Why,
it's a farce. Here I am sporting a Phi Bete key, an honor student if you
please, and all that I really know as a result of my college 'education'
is the fine points of football and how to play poker. I don't really
know one damn thing about anything."

The other men were Jack Lawrence and Pudge Jamieson. Jack was an earnest
chap, serious and hard working but without a trace of brilliance. He,
too, wore a Phi Beta Kappa key, and so did Pudge. Hugh was the only one
of the group who had not won that honor; the fact that he was the only
one who had won a letter was hardly, he felt, complete justification.
His legs no longer seemed more important than his brains; in fact, when
he had sprained a tendon and been forced to drop track, he had been
genuinely pleased.

Pudge was quite as plump as he had been as a freshman and quite as
jovial, but he did not tell so many smutty stories. He still persisted
in crossing his knees in spite of the difficulties involved. When
Winsor finished speaking, Pudge forced his legs into his favorite
position for them and then twinkled at Winsor through his glasses.

"Right you are, George," he said in his quick way. "I wear a Phi Bete
key, too. We both belong to the world's greatest intellectual
fraternity, but what in hell do we know? We've all majored in English
except Jack, and I'll bet any one of us can give the others an exam
offhand that they can't pass. I'm going to law school. I hope to God
that I learn something there. I certainly don't feel that I know
anything now as a result of my four years of 'higher education.'"

"Well, if you fellows feel that way," said Hugh mournfully, "how do you
suppose I feel? I made my first really good record last term, and that
wasn't any world beater. I've learned how to gamble and smoke and drink
and pet in college, but that's about all that I have learned. I'm not as
fine as I was when I came here. I've been coarsened and cheapened; all
of us have. I take things for granted that shocked me horribly once. I
know that they ought to shock me now, but they don't. I've made some
friends and I've had a wonderful time, but I certainly don't feel that I
have got any other value out of college."

Winsor could not sit still and talk. He filled his pipe viciously,
lighted it, and then jumped up and leaned against the mantel. "I admit
everything that's been said, but I don't believe that it is altogether
our fault." He was intensely in earnest, and so were his listeners.
"Look at the faculty. When I came here I thought that they were all wise
men because they were On the faculty. Well, I've found out otherwise.
Some of them know a lot and can't teach, a few of them know a lot and
can teach, some of them know a little and can't teach, and some of them
don't know anything and can't explain c-a-t. Why, look at Kempton. That
freshman, Larson, showed me a theme the other day that Kempton had
corrected. It was full of errors that weren't marked, and it was nothing
in the world but drip. Even Larson knew that, but he's the foxy kid; he
wrote the theme about Kempton. All right--Kempton gives him a B and
tells him that it is very amusing. Hell of a lot Larson's learning. Look
at Kane in math. I had him when I was a freshman."

"Me, too," Hugh chimed in.

"'Nough said, then. Math's dry enough, God knows, but Kane makes it
dryer. He's a born desiccator. He could make 'Hamlet' as dry as
calculus."

"Right-o," said Pudge. "But Mitchell could make calculus as exciting as
'Hamlet.' It's fifty-fifty."

"And they fired Mitchell." Jack Lawrence spoke for the first time. "I
have that straight. The administration seems afraid of a man that can
teach. They've made Buchanan a full professor, and there isn't a man in
college who can tell what he's talking about. He's written a couple of
books that nobody reads, and that makes him a scholar. I was forced to
take three courses with him. They were agony, and he never taught me a
damn thing."

"Most of them don't teach you a damn thing," Winsor exclaimed, tapping
his pipe on the mantel. "They either tell you something that you can
find more easily in a book, or just confuse you with a lot of ponderous
lectures that put you to sleep or drive you crazy if you try to
understand them."

"There are just about a dozen men in this college worth listening to,"
Hugh put in, "and I've got three of them this term. I'm learning more
than I did in my whole three first years. Let's be fair, though. We're
blaming it all on the profs, and you know damn well that we don't study.
All we try to do is to get by--I don't mean you Phi Betes; I mean all
the rest of us--and if we can put anything over on the profs we are
tickled pink. We're like a lot of little kids in grammar-school. Just
look at the cheating that goes on, the copying of themes, and the
cribbing. It's rotten!"

Winsor started to protest, but Hugh rushed on. "Oh, I know that the
majority of the fellows don't consciously cheat; I'm talking about the
copying of math problems and the using of trots and the paraphrasing of
'Literary Digest' articles for themes and all that sort of thing. If
more than half of the fellows don't do that sort of thing some time or
other in college, I'll eat my hat. And we all know darned well that we
aren't supposed to do it, but the majority of fellows cheat in some way
or other before they graduate!

"We aren't so much. Do you remember, George, what Jimmie Henley said to
us when we were sophomores in English Thirty-six? He laid us out cold,
said that we were as standardized as Fords and that we were ashamed of
anything intellectual. Well, he was right. Do you remember how he ended
by saying that if we were the cream of the earth, he felt sorry for the
skimmed milk--or something like that?"

"Sure, _I_ remember," Winsor replied, running his fingers through his
rusty hair. "He certainly pulled a heavy line that day. He was right,
too."

"I'll tell you what," exclaimed Pudge suddenly, so suddenly that his
crossed legs parted company and his foot fell heavily to the floor.
"Let's put it up to Henley in class to-morrow. Let's ask him straight
out if he thinks college is worth while."

"He'll hedge," objected Lawrence. "All the profs do if you ask them
anything like that." Winsor laughed. "You don't know Jimmie Henley. He
won't hedge. You've never had a class with him, but Hugh and Pudge and
I are all in English Fifty-three, and we'll put it up to him. He'll tell
us what he thinks all right, and I hope to God that he says it is worth
while. I'd like to have somebody convince me that I've got something out
of these four years beside lower ideals. Hell, sometimes I think that
we're all damn fools. We worship athletics--no offense, Hugh--above
everything else; we gamble and drink and talk like bums; and about every
so often some fellow has to go home because a lovely lady has left him
with bitter, bitter memories. I'm with Henley. If we're the cream of the
earth--well, thank the Lord, we're not."

"Who is," Lawrence asked earnestly.

"God knows."




CHAPTER XXV


English 53 had only a dozen men in it; so Henley conducted the course in
a very informal fashion. The men felt free to bring up for discussion
any topic that interested them.

Nobody was surprised, therefore, when George Winsor asked Henley to
express his opinion of the value of a college education. He reminded
Henley of what he had said two years before, and rapidly gave a resume
of the discussion that resulted in the question he was asking. "We'd
like to know, too," he concluded, grinning wickedly, "just whom you
consider the cream of the earth. You remember you said that if we were
you felt sorry for the skimmed milk."

Henley leaned back in his chair and laughed. "Yes," he said, "I remember
saying that. I didn't think, though, that you would remember it for two
years. You seem to remember most of what I said. I am truly astonished."
He grinned back at Winsor. "The swine seem to have eaten the pearls."

The class laughed, but Winsor was not one to refuse the gambit. "They
were very indigestible," he said quickly.

"Good!" Henley exclaimed. "I wanted them to give you a belly-ache, and I
am delighted that you still suffer."

"We do," Pudge Jamieson admitted, "but we'd like to have a little mercy
shown to us now. We've spent four years here, and while we've enjoyed
them, we've just about made up our minds that they have been all in all
wasted years."

"No." Henley was decisive. His playful manner entirely disappeared. "No,
not wasted. You have enjoyed them, you say. Splendid justification. You
will continue to enjoy them as the years grow between you and your
college days. All men are sentimental about college, and in that
sentimentality there is continuous pleasure."

"Your doubt delights me. Your feeling that you haven't learned anything
delights me, too. It proves that you have learned a great deal. It is
only the ignoramus who thinks he is wise; the wise man knows that he is
an ignoramus. That's a platitude, but it is none the less true. I have
cold comfort for you: the more you learn, the less confident you will be
of your own learning, the more utterly ignorant you will feel. I have
never known so much as, the day I graduated from high school. I held my
diploma and the knowledge of the ages in my hand. I had never heard of
Socrates, but I would have challenged him to a debate without the
slightest fear."

"Since then I have grown more humble, so humble that there are times
when I am ashamed to come into the class-room. What right have I to
teach anybody anything? I mean that quite sincerely. Then I remember
that, ignorant as I am, the undergraduates are more ignorant. I take
heart and mount the rostrum ready to speak with the authority of a
pundit."

He realized that he was sliding off on a tangent and paused to find a
new attack. Pudge Jamieson helped him.

"I suppose that's all true," he said, "but it doesn't explain why
college is really worth while. The fact remains that most of us don't
learn anything, that we are coarsened by college, and that we--well, we
worship false gods."

Henley nodded in agreement. "It would be hard to deny your assertions,"
he acknowledged, "and I don't think that I am going to try to deny them.
Of course, men grow coarser while they are in college, but that doesn't
mean that they wouldn't grow coarser if they weren't in college. It
isn't college that coarsens a man and destroys his illusions; it is
life. Don't think that you can grow to manhood and retain your pretty
dreams. You have become disillusioned about college. In the next few
years you will suffer further disillusionment. That is the price of
living."

"Every intelligent man with ideals eventually becomes a cynic. It is
inevitable. He has standards, and, granted that he is intelligent, he
cannot fail to see how far mankind falls below those standards. The
result is cynicism, and if he is truly intelligent, the cynicism is
kindly. Having learned that man is frail, he expects little of him;
therefore, if he judges at all, his judgment is tempered either with
humor or with mercy."

The dozen boys were sprawled lazily in their chairs, their feet resting
on the rungs of the chairs before them, but their eyes were fastened
keenly on Henley. All that he was saying was of the greatest importance
to them. They found comfort in his words, but the comfort raised new
doubts, new problems.

"How does that affect college?" Winsor asked.

"It affects it very decidedly," Henley replied. "You haven't become true
cynics yet; you expect too much of college. You forget that the men who
run the college and the men who attend it are at best human beings, and
that means that very much cannot be expected of them. You do worship
false gods. I find hope in the fact that you recognize the stuff of
which your gods are made. I have great hopes for the American colleges,
not because I have any reason to believe that the faculties will become
wiser or that the administrations will lead the students to true gods;
not at all, but I do think that the students themselves will find a way.
They have already abandoned Mammon; at least, the most intelligent have,
and I begin to see signs of less adoration for athletics. Athletics, of
course, have their place, and some of the students are beginning to find
that place. Certainly the alumni haven't, and I don't believe that the
administrative officers have, either. Just so long as athletes advertise
the college, the administrations will coddle them. The undergraduates,
however, show signs of frowning on professionalism, and the stupid
athlete is rapidly losing his prestige. An athlete has to show something
more than brawn to be a hero among his fellows nowadays."

He paused, and Pudge spoke up. "Perhaps you are right," he said, "but I
doubt it. Athletics are certainly far more important to us than anything
else, and the captain of the football team is always the biggest man in
college. But I don't care particularly about that. What I want to know
is how the colleges justify their existence. I don't see that you have
proved that they do."

"No, I haven't," Henley admitted, "and I don't know that I can prove it.
Of course, the colleges aren't perfect, not by a long way, but as human
institutions go, I think they justify their existence. The four years
spent at college by an intelligent boy--please notice that I say
intelligent--are well spent indeed. They are gloriously worth while. You
said that you have had a wonderful time. Not so wonderful as you think.
It is a strange feeling that we have about our college years. We all
believe that they are years of unalloyed happiness, and the further we
leave them behind the more perfect they seem. As a matter of fact, few
undergraduates are truly happy. They are going through a period of storm
and stress; they are torn by _Weltschmerz_. Show me a nineteen-year-old
boy who is perfectly happy and you show me an idiot. I rarely get a
cheerful theme except from freshmen. Nine tenths of them are expressions
of deep concern and distress. A boy's college years are the years when
he finds out that life isn't what he thought it, and the finding out is
a painful experience. He discovers that he and his fellows are made of
very brittle clay: usually he loathes himself; often he loathes his
fellows.

"College isn't the Elysium that it is painted in stories and novels, but
I feel sorry for any intelligent man who didn't have the opportunity to
go to college. There is something beautiful about one's college days,
something that one treasures all his life. As we grow older, we forget
the hours of storm and stress, the class-room humiliations, the terror
of examinations, the awful periods of doubt of God and man--we forget
everything but athletic victories, long discussions with friends, campus
sings, fraternity life, moonlight on the campus, and everything that is
romantic. The sting dies, and the beauty remains.

"Why do men give large sums of money to their colleges when asked?
Because they want to help society? Not at all. The average man doesn't
even take that into consideration. He gives the money because he loves
his alma mater, because he has beautiful and tender memories of her. No,
colleges are far from perfect, tragically far from it, but any
institution that commands loyalty and love as colleges do cannot be
wholly imperfect. There is a virtue in a college that uninspired
administrative officers, stupid professors, and alumni with false ideals
cannot kill. At times I tremble for Sanford College; there are times
when I swear at it, but I never cease to love it."

"If you feel that way about college, why did you say those things to us
two years ago?" Hugh asked. "Because they were true, all true. I was
talking about the undergraduates then, and I could have said much more
cutting things and still been on the safe side of the truth. There is,
however, another side, and that is what I am trying to give you
now--rather incoherently, I know."

Hugh thought of Cynthia. "I suppose all that you say is true," he
admitted dubiously, "but I can't feel that college does what it should
for us. We are told that we are taught to think, but the minute we bump
up against a problem in living we are stumped just as badly as we were
when we are freshmen."

"Oh, no, not at all. You solve problems every day that would have
stumped you hopelessly as a freshman. You think better than you did four
years ago, but no college, however perfect, can teach you all the
solutions of life. There are no nostrums or cure-alls that the colleges
can give for all the ills and sicknesses of life. You, I am afraid, will
have to doctor those yourself."

"I see." Hugh didn't altogether see. Both college and life seemed more
complicated than he had thought them. "I am curious to know," he added,
"just whom you consider the cream of the earth. That expression has
stuck in my mind. I don't know why--but it has."

Henley smiled. "Probably because it is such a very badly mixed metaphor.
Well, I consider the college man the cream of the earth."

"What?" four of the men exclaimed, and all of them sat suddenly upright.

"Yes--but let me explain. If I remember rightly, I said that if you were
the cream of the earth, I hoped that God would pity the skimmed milk.
Well, everything taken into consideration, I do think that you are the
cream of the earth; and I have no hope for the skimmed milk. Perhaps it
isn't wise for me to give public expression to my pessimism, but you
ought to be old enough to stand it."

"The average college graduate is a pretty poor specimen, but all in all
he is just about the best we have. Please remember that I am talking in
averages. I know perfectly well that a great many brilliant men do not
come to college and that a great many stupid men do come, but the
colleges get a very fair percentage of the intelligent ones and a
comparatively small percentage of the stupid ones. In other words, to
play with my mixed metaphor a bit, the cream is very thin in places and
the skimmed milk has some very thick clots of cream, but in the end the
cream remains the cream and the milk the milk. Everything taken into
consideration, we get in the colleges the young men with the highest
ideals, the loftiest purpose."

"You want to tell me that those ideals are low and the purpose
materialistic and selfish. I know it, but the average college graduate,
I repeat, has loftier ideals and is less materialistic than the average
man who has not gone to college. I wish that I could believe that the
college gives him those ideals. I can't, however. The colleges draw the
best that society has to offer; therefore, they graduate the best."

"Oh, I don't know," a student interrupted. "How about Edison and Ford
and--"

"And Shakspere and Sophocles," Henley concluded for him. "Edison is an
inventive genius, and Ford is a business genius. Genius hasn't anything
to do with schools. The colleges, however, could have made both Ford and
Edison bigger men, though they couldn't have made them lesser geniuses."

"No, we must not take the exceptional man as a standard; we've got to
talk about the average. The hand of the Potter shook badly when he made
man. It was at best a careless job. But He made some better than others,
some a little less weak, a little more intelligent. All in all, those
are the men that come to college. The colleges ought to do a thousand
times more for those men than they do do; but, after all, they do
something for them, and I am optimistic enough to believe that the time
will come when they will do more."

"Some day, perhaps," he concluded very seriously, "our administrative
officers will be true educators; some day perhaps our faculties will be
wise men really fitted to teach; some day perhaps our students will be
really students, eager to learn, honest searchers after beauty and
truth. That day will be the millennium. I look for the undergraduates to
lead us to it."




CHAPTER XXVI


The college year swept rapidly to its close, so rapidly to the seniors
that the days seemed to melt in their grasp. The twentieth of June would
bring them their diplomas and the end of their college life. They felt a
bit chesty at the thought of that B.S. or A.B., but a little sentimental
at the thought of leaving "old Sanford."

Suddenly everything about the college became infinitely precious--every
tradition; every building, no matter how ugly; even the professors, not
just the deserving few--all of them.

Hugh took to wandering about the campus, sometimes alone, thinking of
Cynthia, sometimes with a favored crony such as George Winsor or Pudge
Jamieson. He didn't see very much of Norry the last month or two of
college. He was just as fond of him as ever, but Norry was only a
junior; he would not understand how a fellow felt about Sanford when he
was on the verge of leaving her. But George and Pudge did understand.
The boys didn't say much as they wandered around the buildings, merely
strolled along, occasionally pausing to laugh over some experience that
had happened to one of them in the building they were passing.

Hugh could never pass Surrey Hall without feeling something deeper than
sentimentality. He always thought of Carl Peters, from whom he had not
heard for more than a year. He understood Carl better now, his desire
to be a gentleman and his despair at ever succeeding. Surrey Hall held
drama for Hugh, not all of it pleasant, but he had a deeper affection
for the ivy-covered dormitory then he would ever have for the Nu Delta
House. He wondered what had become of Morse, the homesick freshman.
Poor Morse.... And the bull sessions he had sat in in old Surrey. He
had learned a lot from them, a whole lot....

The chapel where he had slept and surreptitiously eaten doughnuts and
read "The Sanford News" suddenly became a holy building, the building
that housed the soul of Sanford.... He knew that he was sentimental, that
he was investing buildings with a greater significance than they had in
their own right, but he continued to dream over the last four years and
to find a melancholy beauty in his own sentimentality. If it hadn't
been for Cynthia, he would have been perfectly happy.

Soon the examinations were over, and the underclassmen began to
depart. Good-by to all his friends who were not seniors. Good-by to
Norry Parker. "Thanks for the congratulations, old man. Sorry I can't
visit you this summer. Can't you spend a month with me on the farm...?"
Good-by to his fraternity brothers except the few left in his own
delegation. "Good-by, old man, good-by.... Sure, I'll see you next year
at the reunion." Good-by.... Good-by....

Sad, this business of saying good-by, damn sad. Gee, how a fellow would
miss all the good old eggs he had walked with and drunk with and bulled
with these past years. Good eggs, all of them--damn good eggs.... God!
a fellow couldn't appreciate college until he was about to leave it.
Oh, for a chance to live those four years over again. "Would I live
them differently? I'll say I would."

Good-by, boyhood.... Commencement was coming. Hugh hadn't thought
before of what that word meant. Commencement! The beginning. What was
he going to do with this commencement of his into life? Old Pudge was
going to law school and so was Jack Lawrence. George Winsor was going
to medical school. But what was he going to do? He felt so pathetically
unprepared. And then there was Cynthia.... What was he going to do
about her? She rarely left his mind. How could he tackle life when he
couldn't solve the problem she presented? It was like trying to run a
hundred against fast men when a fellow had only begun to train.

Henley had advised him to take a year or so at Harvard if his father
proved willing, and his father was more than willing, even eager. He
guessed that he'd take at least a year in Cambridge. Perhaps he could
find himself in that year. Maybe he could learn to write. He hoped to
God he could.

       *       *       *       *       *

Just before commencement his relations with Cynthia came to a climax.
They had been constantly becoming more complicated. She was demanding
nothing of him, but her letters were tinged with despair. He felt at
last that he must see her. Then he would know whether he loved her or
not. A year before she had said that he didn't. How did she know? She
had said that all he felt for her was sex attraction. How did she know
that? Why, she had said that was all that she felt for him. And he had
heard plenty of fellows argue that love was nothing but sexual
attraction anyway, and that all the stuff the poets wrote was pure bunk.
Freud said something like that, he thought, and Freud knew a damn sight
more about it than the poets.

Yet, the doubt remained. Whether love was merely sexual attraction or
not, he wanted something more than that; his every instinct demanded
something more. He had noticed another thing: the fellows that weren't
engaged said that love was only sexual attraction; those who were
engaged vehemently denied it, and Hugh knew that some of the engaged
men had led gay lives in college. He could not reach any decision; at
times he was sure that what he felt for Cynthia was love; at other times
he was sure that it wasn't.

At last in desperation he telegraphed to her that he was coming to New
York and that she should meet him at Grand Central at three o'clock the
next day. He knew that he oughtn't to go. He would be able to stay in
New York only a little more than two hours because his father and mother
would arrive in Haydensville the day following, and he felt that he had
to be there to greet them. He damned himself for his impetuousness all
during the long trip, and a dozen times he wished he were back safe in
the Nu Delta house. What in hell would he say to Cynthia, anyway? What
would he do when he saw her? Kiss her? "I won't have a damned bit of
sense left if I do."

She was waiting for him as he came through the gate. Quite without
thinking, he put down his bag and kissed her. Her touch had its old
power; his blood leaped. With a tremendous effort of will he controlled
himself. That afternoon was all-important; he must keep his head.

"It's sweet of you to come," Cynthia whispered, clinging to him, "so
damned sweet."

"It's damned good to see you," he replied gruffly. "Come on while I
check this bag. I've only got a little over two hours, Cynthia; I've
got to get the five-ten back. My folks will be in Haydensville to-morrow
morning, and I've got to get back to meet them."

Her face clouded for an instant, but she tucked her arm gaily in his and
marched with him across the rotunda to the checking counter. When Hugh
had disposed of his bag, he suggested that they go to a little tea room
on Fifty-seventh Street. She agreed without argument. Once they were in
a taxi, she wanted to snuggle down into his arm, but she restrained
herself; she felt that she had to play fair.

Hugh said nothing. He was trying to think, and his thoughts whirled
around in a mad, drunken dance. He believed that he would be married
before he took the train back, at least engaged, and what would all that
mean? Did he want to get married? God! he didn't know.

When at last they were settled in a corner of the empty tea-room and had
given their order, they talked in an embarrassed fashion about their
recent letters, both of them carefully quiet and restrained. Finally
Hugh shoved his plate and cup aside and looked straight at her for the
first time. She was thin, much thinner than she had been a year ago, but
there was something sweeter about her, too; she seemed so quiet, so
gentle.

"We aren't going to get anywhere this way, Cynthia," he said
desperately. "We're both evading. I haven't any sense left, but what I
say from now on I am going to say straight out. I swore on the train
that I wouldn't kiss you. I knew that I wouldn't be able to think if I
did--and I can't; all I know is that I want to kiss you again." He
looked at her sitting across the little table from him, so slender and
still--a different Cynthia but damnably desirable. "Cynthia," he added
hoarsely, "if you took my hand, you could lead me to hell."

She in turn looked at him. He was much older than he had been a year
before. Then he had been a boy; now he seemed a man. He had not changed
particularly; he was as blond and young and clean as ever, but there was
something about his mouth and eyes, something more serious and more
stern, that made him seem years older.

"I don't want to lead you to hell, honey," she replied softly. "I left
Prom last year so that I wouldn't do that. I told you then that I wasn't
good for you--but I'm different now."

"I can see that. I don't know what it is, but you're different, awfully
different." He leaned forward suddenly. "Cynthia, shall we go over to
Jersey and get married? I understand that one can there right away.
We're both of age--"

"Wait, Hugh; wait." Cynthia's hands were tightly clasped in her lap.
"Are you sure that you want to? I've been thinking a lot since I got
your telegram. Are you sure you love me?"

He slumped back into his chair. "I don't know what love is," he
confessed miserably. "I can't find out." Cynthia's hands tightened in
her lap. "I've tried to think this business out, and I can't. I haven't
any right to ask you to marry me. I haven't any money, not a bit, and
I'm not prepared to do anything, either. As I wrote you, my folks want
me to go to Harvard next year." The mention of his poverty and of his
inability to support a wife brought him back to something approaching
normal again. "I suppose I'm just a kid, Cynthia," he added more
quietly, "but sometimes I feel a thousand years old. I do right now."

"What were your plans for next year and after that until you saw me?"
Her eyes searched his.

"Oh, I thought I'd go to Harvard a year or two and then try to write or
perhaps teach. Writing is slow business, I understand, and teaching
doesn't pay anything. I don't want to ask my father to support us, and I
won't let your folks. I lost my head when I suggested that we get
married. It would be foolish. I haven't the right."

"No," she agreed slowly; "no, neither of us has the right. I thought
before you came if you asked me to marry you--I was sure somehow that
you would--I would run right off and do it, but now I know that I
won't." She continued to gaze at him, her eyes troubled and confused.
What made him seem so much older, so different?

"Do you think we can ever forget Prom?" She waited for his reply. So
much depended on it.

"Of course," he answered impatiently. "I've forgotten that already. We
were crazy kids, that's all--youngsters trying to act smart and wild."

"Oh!" The ejaculation was soft, but it vibrated with pain. "You mean
that--that you wouldn't--well, you wouldn't get drunk like that again?"

"Of course not, especially at a dance. I'm not a child any longer,
Cynthia. I have sense enough now not to forfeit my self-respect again. I
hope so, anyway. I haven't been drunk in the last year. A drunkard is a
beastly sight, rotten. If I have learned anything in college, it is that
a man has to respect himself, and I can't respect any one any longer who
deliberately reduces himself to a beast. I was a beast with you a year
ago. I treated you like a woman of the streets, and I abused Norry
Parker's hospitality shamefully. If I can help it, I'll never act like a
rotter again, I hate a prig, Cynthia, like the devil, but I hate a
rotter even more. I hope I can learn to be neither."

As he spoke, Cynthia clenched her hands so tightly that the finger-nails
were bruising her tender palms, but her eyes remained dry and her lips
did not tremble. If he could have seen _her_ on some parties this last
year....

"You have changed a lot." Her words were barely audible. "You have
changed an awful lot."

He smiled. "I hope so. There are times now when I hate myself, but I
never hate myself so much as when I think of Prom. I've learned a lot in
the last year, and I hope I've learned enough to treat a decent girl
decently. I have never apologized to you the way I think I ought to."

"Don't!" she cried, her voice vibrant with pain. "Don't! I was more to
blame than you were. Let's not talk about that."

"All right. I'm more than willing to forget it." He paused and then
continued very seriously, "I can't ask you to marry me now,
Cynthia--but--but are you willing to wait for me? It may take time, but
I promise I'll work hard."

Cynthia's hands clenched convulsively. "No, Hugh honey," she whispered;
"I'll never marry you. I--I don't love you."

"What?" he demanded, his senses swimming in hopeless confusion. "What?"

She did not say that she knew that he did not love her; she did not tell
him how much his quixotic chivalry moved her. Nor did she tell him that
she knew only too well that she could lead him to hell, as he said, but
that that was the only place that she could lead him. These things she
felt positive of, but to mention them meant an argument--and an
argument would have been unendurable.

"No," she repeated, "I don't love you. You see, you're so different from
what I remembered. You've grown up and you've changed. Why, Hugh, we're
strangers. I've realized that while you've been talking. We don't know
each other, not a bit. We only saw each other for a week summer before
last and for two days last spring. Now we're two altogether different
people; and we don't know each other at all."

She prayed that he would deny her statements, that he would say they
knew each other by instinct--anything, so long as he did not agree.

"I certainly don't know you the way you're talking now," he said almost
roughly, his pride hurt and his mind in a turmoil. "I know that we don't
know each other, but I never thought that you thought that mattered."

Her hands clenched more tightly for an instant--and then lay open and
limp in her lap.

Her lips were trembling; so she smiled. "I didn't think it mattered
until you asked me to marry you. Then I knew it did. It was game of you
to offer to take a chance, but I'm not that game. I couldn't marry a
strange man. I like that man a lot, but I don't love him--and you don't
want me to marry you if I don't love you, do you, Hugh?"

"Of course not." He looked down in earnest thought and then said
softly, his eyes on the table, "I'm glad that you feel that way,
Cynthia." She bit her lip and trembled slightly. "I'll confess now that
I don't think that I love you, either. You sweep me clean off my feet
when I'm with you, but when I'm away from you I don't feel that way. I
think love must be something more than we feel for each other." He
looked up and smiled boyishly. "We'll go on being friends anyhow, won't
we?"

Somehow she managed to smile back at him. "Of course," she whispered,
and then after a brief pause added: "We had better go now. Your train
will be leaving pretty soon."

Hugh pulled out his watch. "By jingo, so it will."

He called the waiter, paid his bill, and a few minutes later they turned
into Fifth Avenue. They had gone about a block down the avenue when Hugh
saw some one a few feet ahead of him who looked familiar. Could it be
Carl Peters? By the Lord Harry, it was!

"Excuse me a minute, Cynthia, please. There's a fellow I know."

He rushed forward and caught Carl by the arm. Carl cried, "Hugh, by
God!" and shook hands with him violently. "Hell, Hugh, I'm glad to see
you."

Hugh turned to Cynthia, who was a pace behind them. He introduced Carl
and Cynthia to each other and then asked Carl why in the devil he
hadn't written.

Carl switched his leg with his cane and grinned. "You know darn well,
Hugh, that I don't write letters, but I did mean to write to you; I
meant to often. I've been traveling. My mother and I have just got back
from a trip around the world. Where are you going now?"

"Oh, golly," Hugh exclaimed, "I've got to hurry if I'm going to make
that train. Come on, Carl, with us to Grand Central. I've got to get the
five-ten back to Haydensville. My folks are coming up to-morrow for
commencement." Instantly he hated himself. Why did he have to mention
commencement? He might have remembered that it should have been Carl's
commencement, too.

Carl, however, did not seem in the least disturbed, and he cheerfully
accompanied Hugh and Cynthia to the station. He looked at Cynthia and
had an idea.

"Have you checked your bag?"

"Yes," Hugh replied.

"Well, give me the check and I'll get it for you. I'll meet you at the
gate."

Hugh surrendered the check and then proceeded to the gate with Cynthia.
He turned to her and asked gently, "May I kiss you, Cynthia?"

For an instant she looked down and said nothing; then she turned her
face up to his. He kissed her tenderly, wondering why he felt no
passion, afraid that he would.

"Good-by, Cynthia dear," he whispered.

Her hands fluttered helplessly about his coat lapels and then fell to
her side. She managed a brave little smile. "Good-by--honey."

Carl rushed up with the bag. "Gosh, Hugh, you've got to hurry; they're
closing the gate." He gripped his hand for a second. "Visit me at Bar
Harbor this summer if you can."

"Sure. Good-by, old man. Good-by Cynthia."

"Good-by--good-by."

Hugh slipped through the gate and, turned to wave at Carl and Cynthia.
They waved back, and then he ran for the train.

On the long trip to Haydensville Hugh relaxed. Now that the strain was
over, he felt suddenly weak, but it was sweet weakness. He could
graduate in peace now. The visit to New York had been worth while. And
what do you know, bumping into old Carl like that I Cynthia and he were
friends, too, the best friends in the world, but she no longer wanted to
marry him. That was fine.... He remembered the picture she and Carl had
made standing on the other side of the gate from him. "What a peach of a
pair. Golly, wouldn't it be funny if they hit it off...."

He thought over every word that he and Cynthia had said. She certainly
had been square all right. Not many like her, but "by heaven, I knew
down in my heart all the time that I didn't want to get married or even
engaged. It would have played hell with everything."




CHAPTER XXVII


The next morning Hugh's mother and father arrived in the automobile. He
was to drive them back to Merrytown the day after commencement. At last
he stood in the doorway of the Nu Delta house and welcomed his father,
but he had forgotten all about that youthful dream. He was merely aware
that he was enormously glad to see the "folks" and that his father
seemed to be withering into an old man.

As the under-classmen departed, the alumni began to arrive. The "five
year" classes dressed in extraordinary outfits--Indians, Turks, and men
in prison garb roamed the campus. There were youngsters just a year out
of college, still looking like undergraduates, still full of college
talk. The alumni ranged all the way from these one-year men to the
fifty-year men, twelve old men who had come back to Sanford fifty years
after their graduation, and two of them had come all the way across the
continent. There had been only fifty men originally in that class; and
twelve of them were back.

What brought them back? Hugh wondered. He thought he knew, but he
couldn't have given a reason. He watched those old men wandering slowly
around the campus, one of them with his grandson who was graduating this
year, and he was awed by their age and their devotion to their alma
mater. Yes, Henley had been right. Sanford was far from perfect, far
from it--a child could see that--but there was something in the college
that gripped one's heart. What faults that old college had; but how one
loved her!

Thousands of Japanese lanterns had been strung around the campus; an
electric fountain sparkled and splashed its many-colored waters; a band
seemed to be playing every hour of the day and night from the band-stand
in front of the Union. It was a gay scene, and everybody seemed superbly
happy except, possibly, the seniors. They pretended to be happy, but all
of them were a little sad, a little frightened. College had been very
beautiful--and the "world outside," what was it? What did it have in
store for them?

There were mothers and fathers there to see their sons receive their
degrees, there were the wives and children of the alumni, there were
sisters and fiancees of the seniors. Nearly two thousand people; and at
least half of the alumni drunk most of the time. Very drunk, many of
them, and very foolish, but nobody minded. Somehow every one seemed to
realize that in a few brief days they were trying to recapture a
youthful thrill that had gone forever. Some of the drunken ones seemed
very silly, some of them seemed almost offensive; all of them were
pathetic.

They had come back to Sanford where they had once been so young and
exuberant, so tireless in pleasure, so in love with living; and they
were trying to pour all that youthful zest into themselves again out of
a bottle bought from a bootlegger. Were they having a good time? Who
knows? Probably not. A bald-headed man does not particularly enjoy
looking at a picture taken in his hirsute youth; and yet there is a
certain whimsical pleasure in the memories the picture brings.

For three days there was much gaiety, much singing of class songs,
constant parading, dances, speech-making, class circuses, and endless
shaking of hands and exchanging of reminiscences. The seniors moved
through all the excitement quietly, keeping close to their relatives and
friends. Graduation wasn't so thrilling as they had expected it to be;
it was more sad. The alumni seemed to be having a good time; they were
ridiculously boyish: only the seniors were grave, strangely and
unnaturally dignified.

Most of the alumni left the night before the graduation exercises. The
parents and fiancees remained. They stood in the middle of the campus
and watched the seniors, clad in caps and gowns, line up before the
Union at the orders of the class marshal.

Finally, the procession, the grand marshal, a professor, in the lead
with a wand in his hand, then President Culver and the governor of the
State, then the men who were to receive honorary degrees--a writer, a
college president, a philanthropist, a professor, and three
politicians--then the faculty in academic robes, their many-colored
hoods brilliant against their black gowns. And last the seniors, a long
line of them marching in twos headed by their marshal.

The visitors streamed after them into the chapel. The seniors sat in
their customary seats, the faculty and the men who were to receive
honorary degrees on a platform that had been built at the altar. After
they were seated, everything became a blur to Hugh. He hardly knew what
was happening. He saw his father and mother sitting in the transept. He
thought his mother was crying. He hoped not.... Some one prayed
stupidly. There was a hymn.... What was it Cynthia had said? Oh, yes: "I
can't marry a stranger." Well, they weren't exactly strangers.... He was
darn glad he had gone to New York.... The president seemed to be saying
over and over again, "By the power invested in me ..." and every time
that he said it, Professor Blake would slip the loop of a colored hood
over the head of a writer or a politician--and then it was happening all
over again.

Suddenly the class marshal motioned to the seniors to rise. They put on
their mortar-boards. The president said once more, "By the power
invested in me...." The seniors filed by the president, and the grand
marshal handed each of them a roll of parchment tied with blue and
orange ribbons. Hugh felt a strange thrill as he took his. He was
graduated; he was a bachelor of science.... Back again to their seats.
Some one was pronouncing benediction.... Music from the organ--marching
out of the chapel, the surge of friends--his father shaking his hand,
his mother's arms around his neck; she _was_ crying....

Graduation was over, and, with it Hugh's college days. Many of the
seniors left at once. Hugh would have liked to go, too, but his father
wanted to stay one more day in Haydensville. Besides, there was a final
senior dance that night, and he thought that Hugh ought to attend it.

Hugh did go to the dance, but somehow it brought him no pleasure.
Although it was immensely decorous, it reminded him of Cynthia. He
thought of her tenderly. The best little girl he'd ever met.... He
danced on, religiously steering around the sisters and fiancees of his
friends, but he could not enjoy the dance. Shortly after eleven he
slipped out of the gymnasium and made one last tour of the campus.

It was a moonlight night, and the campus was mysterious with shadows.
The elms shook their leaves whisperingly; the tower of the chapel looked
like magic tracery in the moonlight. He paused before Surrey Hall, now
dark and empty. Good old Carl.... Carl and Cynthia? He wondered....
Pudge had roomed there, too. He passed on. Keller Hall, Cynthia and
Norry.... "God, what a beast I was that night. How white Norry was--and
Cynthia, too," Cynthia again. She'd always be a part of Sanford to him.
On down to the lake to watch the silver path of the moonlight and the
heavy reflections near the shore. Swimming, canoeing, skating--he and
Cynthia in the woods beyond.... On back to the campus, around the
buildings, every one of them filled with memories. Four years--four
beautiful, wonderful years.... Good old Sanford....

Midnight struck. Some one turned a switch somewhere. The Japanese
lanterns suddenly lost their colors and faded to gray balloons in the
moonlight. Some men were singing on the Union steps. It was a few
seniors, Hugh knew; they had been singing for an hour.

He stood in the center of the campus and listened, his eyes full of
tears. Earnestly, religiously, the men sang, their voices rich with
emotion:


                "Sanford, Sanford, mother of men,
                 Love us, guard us, hold us true.
                 Let thy arms enfold us;
                 Let thy truth uphold us.
                 Queen of colleges, mother of men--
                 Alma mater--Sanford--hail!
                 Alma-mater--Hail!--Hail!"


Hugh walked slowly across the campus toward the Nu Delta house. He was
both happy and sad--happy because the great adventure was before him
with all its mystery, sad because he was leaving something beautiful
behind....











End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Plastic Age, by Percy Marks

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PLASTIC AGE ***

***** This file should be named 16532.txt or 16532.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/5/3/16532/

Produced by Scott G. Sims and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.net/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.net

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.net),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org

Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
donations.  To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     http://www.gutenberg.net

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

*** END: FULL LICENSE ***